Nokia Networks
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2) Student Guide OS8212-16A-NRM
2
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
This page is left blank for your notes. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... © Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved. ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................
Legal Notice
Legal Notice Intellectual Property Rights All copyrights and intellectual property rights for Nokia Solutions and Networks training documentation, product documentation and slide presentation material, all of which are forthwith known as Nokia Solutions and Networks training material, are the exclusive property of Nokia Solutions and Networks. Nokia Solutions and Networks owns the rights to copying, modification, translation, adaptation or derivatives including any improvements or developments. Nokia Solutions and Networks has the sole right to copy, distribute, amend, modify, develop, license, sublicense, sell, transfer and assign the Nokia Solutions and Networks training material. Individuals can use the Nokia Solutions and Networks training material for their own personal self-development only, those same individuals cannot subsequently pass on that same Intellectual Property to others without the prior written agreement of Nokia Solutions and Networks. The Nokia Solutions and Networks training material cannot be used outside of an agreed Nokia Solutions and Networks training session for development of groups without the prior written agreement of Nokia Solutions and Networks. Indemnity The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This document is intended for the use of Nokia Solutions and Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under which the document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Solutions and Networks. The document has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Solutions and Networks welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the documentation. The information or statements given in this document concerning the suitability, capacity, or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given “as is” and all liability arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively in a separate agreement between Nokia Solutions and Networks and the customer. However, Nokia Solutions and Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia Solutions and Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Solutions and Networks, explain issues which may not be covered by the document. Nokia Solutions and Networks will correct errors in the document as soon as possible. IN NO EVENT WILL NOKIA SOLUTIONS AND NETRORKS BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENT OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY MONETARY LOSSES,SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY OR DATA,THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION IN IT. This document and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws. Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective owners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only. Copyright © Nokia Solutions and Networks 2013. All rights reserved. About Nokia Nokia invests in technologies important in a world where billions of devices are connected. We are focused on three businesses: network infrastructure software, hardware and services, which we offer through Networks; location intelligence, which we provide through HERE; and advanced technology development and licensing, which we pursue through Technologies. Each of these businesses is a leader in its respective field. Through Networks, Nokia is the world’s specialist in mobile broadband. From the first ever call on GSM, to the first call on LTE, we operate at the forefront of each generation of mobile technology. Our global experts invent the new capabilities our customers need in their networks. We provide the world’s most efficient mobile networks, the intelligence to maximize the value of those networks, and the services to make it all work seamlessly. http://www.nsn.com http://www.company.nokia.com
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
3
4
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Safety statements in Student Handouts
Presents information to identify and warn of a situation where improper precautions will result in death or serious (irreversible) personal injury.
Presents information to identify and warn of a situation where improper precautions could result in death or serious (irreversible) personal injury.
Presents information to warn of a potentially hazardous situation where improper precautions could result in minor or moderate (reversible) personal injury. This alert is also used to identify a situation where equipment damage could occur and help you avoid damaging your equipment.
Presents information to identify and warn of a potentially hazardous situation to help avoid the possibility of property damage.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Contents
Contents Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2) Course Description................................................................................................ 13 Getting started with NetAct ...................................................................................17 Module Objectives ................................................................................................ 17 Nokia Operations and Support System ................................................................ 17 What is NetAct?..................................................................................................17 Nokia Cloud Application Manager...................................................................... 18 Cloud Network Director ..................................................................................... 19 NetAct Managed Network Model........................................................................20 Knowledge Check: NetAct functionality..............................................................22 Knowledge Check: NetAct Managed Network Model.........................................23 NetAct Architecture and virtualization....................................................................24 Three tiered Architecture.................................................................................... 24 Virtualization....................................................................................................... 25 NetAct Deployments...........................................................................................27 NetAct Interfaces ............................................................................................... 29 Knowledge Check: Virtualization........................................................................ 30 Knowledge Check: NetAct Deployments............................................................31 Accessing NetAct...................................................................................................32 NetAct Start Page...............................................................................................32 Lab exercise: Connecting to NetAct .................................................................. 34 Lab exercise: NetAct Start Page........................................................................ 35 NetAct Application Categories .............................................................................. 36 Start page Applications Categories.................................................................... 36 Reporting category............................................................................................. 37 Configuration category....................................................................................... 40 NetAct Configurator............................................................................................ 42 Monitor category.................................................................................................43 User Assistance Category.................................................................................. 46 Administration category...................................................................................... 47 Security category................................................................................................49 Optimization category.........................................................................................50 Lab exercise: Application Categories................................................................. 51 Managed Objects...................................................................................................52 Components of Network Topology..................................................................... 52 NetAct User Assistance ........................................................................................ 55 Operating Documentation...................................................................................55 Nokia Online Service (NOLS).............................................................................58 Online Documentation........................................................................................ 59 © Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
5
6
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Object Information Browser................................................................................ 61 Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (1/2)....................................................... 64 Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (2/2)....................................................... 66 Lab exercise: Object Information Browser..........................................................68 Summary: Getting started with NetAct ..................................................................69 Basic Fault Management with NetAct................................................................... 71 Module Objectives ................................................................................................ 71 Fault Management Basic Concepts ......................................................................71 Strategies for Effective Network Monitoring....................................................... 71 Fault Management Events..................................................................................73 Alarm Flow Supervision......................................................................................75 Defining the Components of Network Topology................................................. 76 Knowledge Check: Fault Management Concepts ............................................. 79 Common Operations in NetAct Monitor Desktop ..................................................80 Fault Management System in NetAct................................................................. 80 Monitor Applications........................................................................................... 82 Common Desktop Functionality..........................................................................83 Managing the Workspace...................................................................................84 Managing tool windows...................................................................................... 85 Editing data and saving the changes..................................................................86 Using the clipboard.............................................................................................87 Using the Properties tool.................................................................................... 88 Using default keyboard shortcuts....................................................................... 89 Customizing keyboard shortcuts........................................................................ 90 Audible Alarms................................................................................................... 91 Lab exercise: NetAct Monitor Desktop............................................................... 94 Monitoring Network ...............................................................................................96 Fault Management Workflow .............................................................................96 Alarm Monitoring Tools....................................................................................... 97 Alarm Monitoring using Alarm Lists.................................................................... 99 Special Columns in Alarm List..........................................................................101 Alarm Details.................................................................................................... 102 Alarm History.................................................................................................... 103 Warning List......................................................................................................104 Reconfiguring the Alarm and Warning Lists display......................................... 105 Immediate access to Alarm and Object Tasks from Alarm Lists...................... 106 Alarm Monitoring using Network Views ........................................................... 107 Loading Views in Network View....................................................................... 108 Network Views Monitor Modes......................................................................... 110 Switching between Monitor and Edit mode....................................................... 111
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Contents
Navigating in the view hierarchy....................................................................... 112 Network Objects............................................................................................... 113 Topology view objects.......................................................................................114 Object States.................................................................................................... 116 Administrative State..........................................................................................117 Operational states.............................................................................................118 Maintenance Mode........................................................................................... 119 Tool tip and Notes indicator.............................................................................. 120 Alarm and Subview States............................................................................... 121 Single RAN Site View....................................................................................... 123 Site View...........................................................................................................125 Finding Managed Objects.................................................................................127 Object Explorer.................................................................................................128 Displaying the Managed Objects Attributes......................................................130 Alarm Operations in an Object......................................................................... 132 Searching for managed objects........................................................................135 Managed Objects List.......................................................................................137 Switching the view mode and selecting columns attributes..............................138 Filtering managed object classes..................................................................... 139 Object Search...................................................................................................141 Viewing objects associated with a Maintenance Region or Site.......................143 Navigating to other tools...................................................................................144 Lab exercise: Object Explorer Tool ..................................................................145 Lab exercise: Object Search ........................................................................... 148 Lab exercise: Configuration Database Modification......................................... 151 Lab exercise: Network Views........................................................................... 153 Lab exercise: Alarm Lists and Warning Lists....................................................155 Alarm Statistics Reporting .................................................................................. 157 Alarm Reports Dashboard................................................................................ 157 Alarm Reports Dashboard Configuration..........................................................158 Search Alarms.................................................................................................. 160 Search Result................................................................................................... 163 Scheduling Task List.........................................................................................165 Schedule Task Report...................................................................................... 166 Lab exercise: Alarm Report Dashboard........................................................... 167 Summary: Basic Fault Management ...................................................................169 Advanced Fault Management with NetAct..........................................................171 Module Objectives .............................................................................................. 171 Alarm Filtering and Reduction of Alarm Flow...................................................... 171 Filtering the Alarm and Warning Lists...............................................................171
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
7
8
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Creating an Alarm Filter....................................................................................172 Activating a Filter in Alarm or Warning Lists.....................................................174 Alarm Flow Reduction in NetAct.......................................................................175 Selecting the correct alarm reduction technique.............................................. 176 Implementing feasible alarm reduction techniques.......................................... 177 Configuring Alarm Reduction in NetAct............................................................ 178 Reducing alarms caused by network maintenance with Maintenance mode... 179 Managing Fault Management processing Rules.............................................. 181 Managing Rules and Rule Folders................................................................... 182 General Rules with Rule Editor........................................................................ 185 Alarm Definitions.............................................................................................. 186 Relation Conditions.......................................................................................... 188 Actions..............................................................................................................191 Scheduling Definitions...................................................................................... 193 Predefined Correlation Rules........................................................................... 194 Other Predefined Rules.................................................................................... 196 Rule Analyzer................................................................................................... 199 Lab exercise: Rule Explorer and Rule Editor....................................................201 Lab exercise: Alarm Filters............................................................................... 203 Lab exercise: Alarm Rules................................................................................205 Topology Management........................................................................................ 206 Managing Network Views................................................................................. 206 Network Views Monitor Modes......................................................................... 207 Creating and Editing Network Views................................................................ 209 Adding a link between two objects....................................................................211 Linking and unlinking a sub-view......................................................................212 Saving a view................................................................................................... 215 Creating Children Objects’ Subviews............................................................... 216 Automatic View Generation.............................................................................. 217 Working Set Manager.......................................................................................218 Creating managed objects................................................................................221 Associating a Managed Object to Maintenance Region...................................223 Associating a Managed Object to Site..............................................................224 Editing object attributes in the Properties tool.................................................. 226 Object Deletion................................................................................................. 228 Deleting managed objects in the operational state...........................................229 Handling of Alarm Processing............................................................................. 231 Fault Management Pipe Status........................................................................ 231 Manual upload of Alarms..................................................................................233 Deleting Alarms of an Object............................................................................235
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Contents
Lab exercise: Enabling the FM Pipe Status......................................................236 Summary: Advanced Fault Management with NetAct......................................... 237 Basic Performance Management with NetAct....................................................239 Module Objectives .............................................................................................. 239 Performance Management Principles .................................................................239 Counters, Measurements and Observations.................................................... 239 Logical Counters and KPIs............................................................................... 241 Key Performance Indicators and Reports.........................................................242 Knowledge Check: Performance Management Concepts................................243 NetAct Performance Manager tools.....................................................................244 Performance Management system ..................................................................244 Performance Manager tools............................................................................. 245 Performance Manager start page.....................................................................247 Lab exercise: Performance Manager tools.......................................................249 Knowledge Check: Performance Manager applications...................................250 Create, customize and generate performance management reports and dashboards.......................................................................................................... 251 Creating reports................................................................................................251 Saving and generating reports......................................................................... 255 Lab exercise: Create report for active user equipment with category 5 for MRBTS............................................................................................................. 257 Creating Dashboards........................................................................................259 Viewing and customizing reports......................................................................261 Report Navigator.............................................................................................. 263 Report Suite Publisher......................................................................................264 Lab exercise: Report Creator........................................................................... 265 Summary: Basic Performance Management with NetAct....................................266 Advanced Performance Management................................................................. 267 Module Objectives .............................................................................................. 267 Create, modify and publish KPIs ........................................................................ 267 KPI Creator introduction................................................................................... 267 Creating a KPI.................................................................................................. 269 Create KPIs...................................................................................................... 274 KPI Publisher....................................................................................................275 Lab exercise: Creating, modifying and publishing KPI .................................... 276 Manage preferences and schedule reporting...................................................... 277 Preferences...................................................................................................... 277 Report Scheduler .............................................................................................278 Lab exercise: Scheduling a report.................................................................... 279 Set threshold values for alarms........................................................................... 280 Thresholder and Profiler .................................................................................. 280
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
9
10
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: Object selection..........................................................................281 Lab exercise: Time Selection........................................................................... 282 Lab exercise: Alarm Settings............................................................................283 Lab exercise: Threshold information and notification....................................... 284 Create and activate measurement plans............................................................. 285 Administration of Measurements...................................................................... 285 Creating plan.................................................................................................... 287 Activating plan.................................................................................................. 290 Lab exercise: Creating new measurement plan for LTE cell load ................... 292 Summary: Advanced Performance Management................................................293 Configuration Management..................................................................................295 Module Objectives .............................................................................................. 295 Configuration Management in NetAct .................................................................295 Overview...........................................................................................................295 Configuration Management Process................................................................ 296 Configurator Basic Concepts............................................................................297 Managed Objects............................................................................................. 298 Working sets.....................................................................................................299 Configuration Types..........................................................................................300 Configuration Rules and Checks...................................................................... 304 NetAct Configurator Applications.........................................................................305 Configurator Architecture..................................................................................305 CM Editor..........................................................................................................306 CM Analyzer..................................................................................................... 307 CM Rule Editor................................................................................................. 308 Selecting a template type................................................................................. 309 Filling in the templates parameters...................................................................310 CM Operations Manager.................................................................................. 311 CM Reference.................................................................................................. 312 Flexible CM Search.......................................................................................... 313 CM History........................................................................................................314 Hardware Management functionality................................................................ 315 Configurator Basic User Tasks............................................................................ 317 General Workflow............................................................................................. 317 Sychronize Network Data................................................................................. 318 Hardware Configuration Upload / Export..........................................................321 Viewing Actual Configuration............................................................................323 CM Editor: View Filter.......................................................................................326 Managing Working Sets................................................................................... 328 Selecting Working Set to be used as filter........................................................330
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Contents
Adding managed objects to working set(s).......................................................332 Creating working set from CM Query............................................................... 334 Modifying Parameters via Working Set............................................................ 335 Deleting Objects from the NetAct CM Database ............................................. 340 Exporting Configuration.................................................................................... 345 Export / Import data with CM Editor..................................................................347 Exporting relationship plan using CM Editor - Table Editor.............................. 348 Importing relationship plan using CM Editor.....................................................351 Displaying plans............................................................................................... 352 Mass parameter changes and plan creation.................................................... 353 Changing Mass Parameter...............................................................................354 Creating Plan....................................................................................................357 Checking Plans.................................................................................................359 Provisioning Plans............................................................................................ 362 Procedure: Provisioning plans..........................................................................364 Comparing plans to actual configuration.......................................................... 366 Searching Managed Objects with Flexible CM Search.................................... 368 Operations with CM History..............................................................................370 Generating report on parameter changes........................................................ 371 Viewing historical configuration snapshots of NEs........................................... 374 Lab exercise: HW Inventory Management....................................................... 376 Lab exercise: CM tools..................................................................................... 377 Optimizer............................................................................................................. 380 Optimizer Overview.......................................................................................... 380 Optimizer main user interface...........................................................................382 Summary: Configuration Management................................................................ 386 License management in NetAct...........................................................................387 Module Objectives .............................................................................................. 387 NetAct licensing concepts....................................................................................387 NetAct Licensing...............................................................................................387 NetAct software asset protection......................................................................... 390 NetAct hard lock............................................................................................... 390 License Manager to check licenses ....................................................................395 License Management Overview ...................................................................... 395 Licensing Concepts: Pool License....................................................................398 Licensing Concepts: License Sets....................................................................399 License States.................................................................................................. 400 License Management Tasks............................................................................. 402 License Import.................................................................................................. 403 Viewing Licenses..............................................................................................405
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
11
12
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Uploading Licenses.......................................................................................... 408 Exporting Licenses........................................................................................... 409 Distributing Licenses........................................................................................ 410 Feature Templates............................................................................................414 Network Element Audit against Feature Template........................................... 415 License Pool Substitution................................................................................. 416 Licenses Reports..............................................................................................417 Viewing Recent Operations.............................................................................. 419 Software Asset Monitoring...................................................................................420 Introduction to Software Asset Monitoring........................................................420 Software Asset Monitoring Notifications........................................................... 423 Software Asset Monitoring Reports.................................................................. 424 LTE and SRAN Licenses..................................................................................... 427 LTE and SRAN License Management..............................................................427 Summary: License management in NetAct......................................................... 430 Software Management.......................................................................................... 431 Module Objectives .............................................................................................. 431 Software Management.........................................................................................431 Software Management in NetAct......................................................................431 Software Manager............................................................................................ 433 Software Manager Operations..........................................................................435 Software Manager Graphical User Interface.................................................... 436 Network Software Status.................................................................................. 437 Viewing Details of a Managed Object...............................................................439 Uploading software configuration information from NE to NetAct.................... 441 Network Operations- Tasks.............................................................................. 444 Software Archive.............................................................................................. 446 Attaching / Viewing Software Package Documentation....................................448 Viewing Compatible Managed Objects.............................................................450 Changing status of software package in Software Archive.............................. 452 Network Element Backup.................................................................................... 454 Network Elements Remote Backup from NetAct..............................................454 Network Elements Backup Archive.................................................................. 455 Summary: Software Management....................................................................... 457
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Course Description
Course Description Course name Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2) Target Group Audience
This course was created for: Personnel who who operate and maintain: •
Telecom networks using NetAct.
•
NetAct when they are NetAct Key users.
Objectives Upon completion of this module, the participant will be able to: •
Explain the role of the NetAct in the mobile network.
•
Describe the NetAct architecture and virtualization concept .
•
Access the NetAct start page.
•
Describe the main functionalities of NetAct.
•
Describe the components of the managed object.
•
Use NetAct Documentation.
•
Explain how to use Fault Management and Topology based tools.
•
Use the Common Desktop within Monitor to arrange a customized user interface.
•
Use the NetAct Monitor Tools to find problems within the Network and begin to find a solution to fix them.
•
Create reports on the most frequent alarms and the most alarmed network elements in the network or in a part of it.
•
Manage the alarm processing using alarm filtering and alarm reduction in NetAct.
•
Manage the NetAct Topology.
•
Revise the status of the alarms processing in NetAct.
•
Explain the purpose of Performance Management describe what is a KPI.
•
Explain the Performance Manager tools.
•
Create, customize and generate performance management reports and dashboards.
•
Create, modify and publish KPIs.
•
Manage preferences and schedule reporting.
•
Set threshold values for alarms.
•
Create and activate measurement plans.
•
Explain the purpose of Configuration Management.
•
List the NetAct Configurator applications and explain their purpose.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
13
14
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
•
Use the Configurator tools for executing basic tasks for configuration management.
•
Explain the Radio Optimization Process in NetAct and the main functionalities of Optimizer.
•
Describe Nokia licensing concepts.
•
Describe NetAct Software Asset Protection.
•
Use License Manager to check license.
•
Use Software Asset monitoring.
•
Describe LTE and SRAN license.
•
Use Software Manager for network element software synchronization, reporting and import.
•
Perform backup tasks for the supported network elements.
Duration 4 days Delivery method CLT Prerequisites The following training course(s) or knowledge is recommended: •
PC literacy
•
Working experience in telecoms environment
Learning Modules • Getting started with NetAct • Basic Fault Management with NetAct • Advanced Fault Management with NetAct • Basic Performance Management with NetAct • Advanced Performance Management • Configuration Management • License management in NetAct • Software Management
Learning module objectives Getting started with NetAct • Explain the role of the NetAct in the mobile network. • Describe the NetAct architecture and the virtualization concept. • Access the NetAct start page. • Describe the main functionalities of NetAct. • Describe the components of the managed object.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Course Description
• Use NetAct Documentation.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct • Explain how to use Fault Management and Topology based tools. • Use the Common Desktop within Monitor to arrange a customized user interface. • Use the Network Monitor Tools to find problems within the Network and begin to find a solution to fix them. • Create reports on the most frequent alarms and the most alarmed network elements in the network or in a part of it.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct • Manage the alarm processing using alarm filtering and alarm reduction in NetAct. • Manage the NetAct Topology. • Revise the status of the alarms processing in NetAct.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct • Explain the purpose of Performance Management and describe what is a KPI. • Explain the Performance Manager tools. • Create, customize and generate performance management reports and dashboards.
Advanced Performance Management • Create, modify and publish KPIs. • Manage preferences and schedule reporting. • Set threshold values for alarms. • Create and activate measurement plans.
Configuration Management • Explain the purpose of Configuration Management. • List the NetAct Configurator applications and explain their purpose. • Use the Configurator tools for executing basic tasks for configuration management. • Explain the Radio Optimization Process in NetAct and the main functionalities of Optimizer.
License management in NetAct • Describe NetAct licensing concepts. • Describe NetAct Software Asset Protection. • Use License Manager to check licenses. • Use Software Asset Monitoring. • Describe LTE and SRAN Licenses.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
15
16
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Software Management • Use Software Manager for network element software synchronization, reporting and import. • Perform backup tasks for the supported network elements.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Getting started with NetAct Module Objectives • • • • • •
Explain the role of the NetAct in the mobile network. Describe the NetAct architecture and the virtualization concept. Access the NetAct start page. Describe the main functionalities of NetAct. Describe the components of the managed object. Use NetAct Documentation.
Nokia Operations and Support System What is NetAct? NetAct is the Network Element manager in the Nokia and OSS portfolio. Performance Manager, Advanced Monitor and Advanced Configurator are using the same platform as NetAct and have some applications in common. The following figure illustrates the Nokia and OSS portfolio.
Figure 1: Nokia and OSS portfolio
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
17
18
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Nokia Cloud Application Manager The following figure illustrates the key features of Nokia Cloud Application Manager.
Figure 2: Nokia Cloud Application Manager Overview
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Cloud Network Director The following figure illustrates the Cloud Network Director.
Figure 3: Nokia Cloud Network Director
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
19
20
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
NetAct Managed Network Model The role of NetAct in managing a network can be classified into two categories: •
NetAct operation system
•
NetAct Global Level (umbrella) products
A cluster is a networked grouping of one or more servers and disk drives that are designed to support each other if a failure occurs in one server or network component. A cluster consists of several co-operating nodes that are interconnected in a redundant way to distribute information and resources. A NetAct cluster is a hierarchical, highly available, and secured computing system that consists of multiple internal components, such as servers, a shared storage system, LAN switches, and routers. It contains the necessary security control, such as encryption capability in data communication, firewall protection, and a hardened system platform. Regional Cluster A Regional Cluster manages a specific region and provides a view to a particular network area or technology. The network elements of a certain sub-network are connected to and managed by a Regional Cluster, which contains the network management system for that region. NetAct can contain several Regional Clusters, which can be connected to the NetAct Products that work in a Global level. Each Regional Cluster runs a database that stores the data arriving from the network elements in the managed region. In the Regional Cluster you do not have access to the data that arrives from network elements belonging to another Regional Cluster. You can have an overview of all the managed objects in the network only in the Global level. Global Level Products The Global Level Products are umbrella solutions that provide an entire view of the network in areas of Fault Management, Performance Management and Configuration Management. The global level products are intended for centralized, network-wide management tasks. They are not connected directly to the network elements but communicate with one or more Regional Clusters. Because these platforms are connected to all the Regional Clusters, you can have a view of all the network elements. Multiple NetAct instances and other Network Management Systems or other vendors, for example MVI, can be connected to a single NetAct Global Product instance. There are three NetAct Global level Products: •
NetAct Advanced Monitor
•
NetAct Advanced Configurator
•
Nokia Performance Manager
The following figure illustrates the NetAct Managed Network Model.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Figure 4: NetAct Managed Network Model
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
21
22
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Knowledge Check: NetAct functionality This section test the students on differentiation of the functions of NetAct Products for Regional Clusters and Global Level. 1. What is the main functionality of NetAct? Notes 1. __________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Knowledge Check: NetAct Managed Network Model This section test the students on differentiation of the functions of NetAct Products for Regional Clusters and Global Level. 1. What is the relationship between NetAct (regional level) and the NetAct Advanced Monitor, Advanced Configurator and Nokia Performance Manager Systems? Notes 1. __________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
23
24
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
NetAct Architecture and virtualization Three tiered Architecture The hardware platform of NetAct consists of three main parts, namely servers, storage devices and network equipment, such as switches and routers. NetAct’s software architecture is three-tiered: the tiers are Presentation tier
Presentation tier hosts client applications. The client applications access Business logic tier and reside typically on a user workstation, for example, a laptop or a desktop computer. The recommended workstation is an office PC with either Windows or Linux operating system.
Business logic tier
Business logic tier hosts the business logic and data access specific for NetAct.
Data tier
Data tier hosts NetAct data storages, that is, the database and directory servers.
Business logic and Data tiers are separated from Presentation tier by firewalls and reside inside the secure domain. Both Business logic tier and Data tier utilize virtual machines running on one or more host servers dedicated to NetAct. The following figure illustrates the NetAct architecture.
Figure 5: NetAct Architecture
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Virtualization With NetAct, we are stepping into a virtualized environment. In a virtualized infrastructure (VI), software is set up in such a way that it can operate independently from the underlying hardware. The physical resources of multiple machines are shared across the whole infrastructure, and they act as a resource pool. In a VI, the physical hardware resources are divided into smaller units, virtual machines (VMs) that have their own allocated virtual CPU and memory. The virtualization layer (HW virtualization capability) is provided by the VMware hypervisor. Servers simply add I/O, CPU and RAM computing resources to the HW pool and virtualization provides a logical view of data, computing power, storage capacity and other server resources. There are no longer dedicated hardware roles. Instead, NetAct applications, mediations, and services running on a number of VMs are powered by a hardware resource pool. Each VM is dimensioned and optimized for the service or services running in it. In this way, the same NetAct functions can be provided but with better high availability and scalability options. The following figure illustrates the virtual environment of NetAct architecture.
Figure 6: NetAct Architecture - Virtual environment Benefits of virtualization in NetAct Virtualization in NetAct brings the following benefits: •
Reduced CAPEX and OPEX by consolidation, for example, improved HW utilization, and the possibility to co-locate Nokia products.
•
Near zero downtime upgrade: Upgrade can be performed by cloning the system within the virtualized infrastructure. Upgrades are performed on the clone side and then after upgrade testing, the clone system becomes the live system.
•
Zero downtime hardware maintenance and capacity can be added without business impact.
•
Efficient high availability and disaster avoidance solutions by using shared redundancy resources.
•
All HW resources are in efficient use: No more fixed amount of physical servers or standby nodes as virtual machines are distributed by load. In addition, decoupling NetAct and 3rd party HW/SW makes HW planning more flexible.
•
Increased elasticity, in other words, scalability in a virtual environment.
The following figure illustrates the benefits of virtualization.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
25
26
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 7: Benefits of virtualization Scalability in virtualized infrastructure Scalability is an important feature of the virtual NetAct environment since there are software components that can be located on more than one VM, and conversely, one VM can contain more than one software component. If the load increases beyond a virtual machine’s ability to handle the load, then the software component and/or virtual machine must be scaled to cope with the increased demand. However, not all software components scale in a similar way: •
Some software components are designed to scale horizontally, which means that additional virtual machines need to be provisioned in order to enable the software component to distribute its load. Horizontal scalability is enabled by placing software components behind load balancers.
•
Other software components scale better vertically, which means that additional resources (CPU and memory) need to be allocated to the virtual machine where the software component is hosted.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
NetAct Deployments NetAct is delivered on three standard configurations: Small, Mainstream, and Large using HP blade servers. Table 1: NetAct Deployments: EMC solution NetAct Configuration Small – 23 VMs
Server Model HP BL460c Gen9 1p12c 96GB
No. of Blades 4
Storage System VNX Small: VNX5200: 3x100GB SSD SSF + 9x600GB SAS SFF + 13x1TB NL_SAS SFF
Optional extra 1x Intel E5-2680v3 twelve – 15 VMs core processors 96 GB memory Diskless
3PAR7200: 8x480GB SSD + 8x900GB SAS SFF
2x10GbE LAN; fc controller (16G)
VNX Backup: VNX5200: 5x600GB SAS SFF + N x (8x1TB NL-SAS SFF) Mainstream – 29 VMs
HP BL460c Gen9 2p8c 128GB
6
VNX Medium: VNX5200: 5x100GB SSD SSF + 13x600GB SAS SFF + 21x1TB NL_SAS SFF
Optional extra 2x Intel E5-2680v3 eight core – 22 VMs processors 128GB memory Diskless 2x10GbE LAN; fc controller (16G)
VNX Backup: VNX5200: 5x600GB SAS SFF + N x (8x1TB NL-SAS SFF)
Large – 35 VMs
HP BL460c Gen9 2p12c 256GB
6
Optional extra 2x Intel E5-2680v3 twelve – 26 VMs core processors 256GB memory Diskless 2x10GbE LAN; fc controller (16G)
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
VNX Large: VNX5200: 5x200GB SSD SSF + 17x600GB SAS SFF + 27x1TB NL_SAS SFF VNX Backup: VNX5200: 5x600GB SAS SFF + N x (8x1TB NL-SAS SFF)
27
28
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Table 2: NetAct Deployments: HP solution NetAct Configuration Small – 23 VMs
Server Model HP BL460c Gen9 1p12c 96GB
No. of Blades 4
HP Backup:
Diskless
P2040 G4: 6x2TB MDL LFF
2x10GbE LAN; fc controller (16G) HP BL460c Gen9 2p8c 128GB
6
HP Medium: 3PAR7200: 8x480GB SSD + 16x900GB SAS SFF
Optional extra 2x Intel E5-2680v3 eight core – 22 VMs processors 128GB memory
Large – 35 VMs
HP Small: 3PAR7200: 8x480GB SSD + 8x900GB SAS SFF
Optional extra 1x Intel E5-2680v3 twelve – 15 VMs core processors 96 GB memory
Mainstream – 29 VMs
Storage System
Diskless
HP Backup:
2x10GbE LAN; fc controller (16G)
P2040 G4: 6x2TB MDL LFF
HP BL460c Gen9 2p12c 256GB
6
Optional extra 2x Intel E5-2680v3 twelve – 26 VMs core processors 256GB memory Diskless 2x10GbE LAN; fc controller (16G)
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
HP Large: 3PAR7200: 12x480GB SSD + 24x900GB SAS SFF HP Backup: P2040 G4: 6x2TB MDL LFF
Getting started with NetAct
NetAct Interfaces In NetAct, interface-related issues are very important, since dependencies are controlled via interfaces, and controlled dependencies are a key enabler of modularity - an important property of the NetAct architecture. NetAct can be integrated into external systems via Northbound interfaces. External systems are employed for similar monitoring, reporting and network planning tasks as NetAct, but at a higher abstraction level. These higher-level systems can be either Nokia or third-party management systems. Lower-level systems or network elements can be integrated into NetAct via Southbound interfaces. Again, these lower-level systems can be either Nokia or third-party element management systems. Mediations are responsible for the interworking or conversion between the protocols or data formats used in the lower-level or higher-level systems and the protocols or data formats used in the NetAct system. Protocols used in the lower-level or higher-level systems are, for instance, SNMP, SOAP or HTTP, and data formats are, for instance, ASCII or XML.
Figure 8: NetAct Interfaces - Northbound and Southbound
Refer to the NetAct documentation to check what are the supported functions for each Network Elements and information on the Northbound interfaces.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
29
30
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Knowledge Check: Virtualization This section test the students on the description of NetAct virtualization. 1. List two benefits of virtualization. Notes 1. __________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Knowledge Check: NetAct Deployments This section test the students on the differentiation of the three NetAct hardware deployments and explaination on how system scalability is implemented. 1. List the three configuration types of NetAct. How is the system size scaled taking into account the virtualization? Notes 1. __________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
31
32
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Accessing NetAct NetAct Start Page NetAct Start Page is a centralized launch pad for starting NetAct user interface applications. You can start all the NetAct applications that have been configured and for which you have permission to launch from NetAct Start. NetAct uses Single Sign-On (SSO) for accessing applications through NetAct Start. To be able to access applications through NetAct Start, a user must have a valid user name and password. The user also must be granted the permissions for accessing the needed applications. Depending on the permissions granted for the user, a list of published applications is visible to the user. From the right-hand dropdown menu the user can select between two different views. Folder view shows the different fragments as folders. The applications are grouped into the following functional areas: •
Administration: Applications for administering adaptations.
•
Configuration: NetAct CM applications, License Manager and Software Manager.
•
Optimization: Applications for network Optimization.
•
Monitoring: NetAct Monitor.
•
Reporting: NetAct Reporter.
•
Security: Certificate, User Management and NE User Management applications.
•
User Assistance: Operating documentation library.
Clicking the Online Help icon opens the Online Help Browser. By selecting Show all applications from the dropdown menu the user can see all the applications in one view and access them by mouse click. All the Java applications are installed on the application server cluster when NetAct is deployed. When a Java Rich Client is accessed for the first time, it is downloaded by the Java Service Wrapper (JWS) to user workstation and launched for the user. The next time it is accessed, the application is started from the local JWS cache. JWS checks the version of the application every time it is launched on the user workstation, and if necessary, updates the application from the application server. The following figure illustrates the accessing NetAct.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Figure 9: Accessing NetAct The following figure illustrates the NetAct start page.
Figure 10: NetAct Start Page New applications visualization modes The following figure illustrates the start page view modes.
Figure 11: Start Page View modes
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
33
34
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: Connecting to NetAct Context This section test the students for setting up the connection to NetAct system and functions of the NetAct Start Page.
Figure 12: Lab exercise: Connecting to NetAct Procedure 1
Login to lab.
2
Open session to NetAct system as omc user. Result of this step Describe the access to NetAct. Did you need to install NetAct SW in your local machine to access the system? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Lab exercise: NetAct Start Page Context This section test the students on setting up connection to NetAct system and functions of the NetAct Start Page.
Figure 13: Lab exercise: NetAct Start Page Procedure 1
Login to NetAct and navigate to Start Page. Result of this step Describe the purpose of the NetAct Start Page. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
2
Change the visualization mode of NetAct Start Page from Show All Application to Show Applications by folder. Result of this step What is the difference between the two visualization modes? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
35
36
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
NetAct Application Categories Start page Applications Categories Each application that a user can launch from NetAct is grouped into the following categories according to what kind of tasks it is used for: Table 3: NetAct Applications Categories Categories
Description
Administration
Applications used for the administration of Mediations and Adaptations in NetAct. Provides as well access to Element Managers.
Deployment
For AddOns Management. AddOns are enterprise applications that can be deployed to the NetAct server.
Configuration
Set of applications used to manage the network configuration.
Optimization
Set of applications used to optimize the network configuration.
Monitoring
This is the group for fault management applications to monitor and troubleshoot the managed network.
Reporting
Use these applications to start measurements and generate reports on the performance of the managed network.
Security
Applications for User Account Management, Network Elements User Management and Certification Authority (Certificates generation).
User Assistance Applications to access User Documentation and Information Adaptation Browser. Some applications are optional and require a license, otherwise they are not visible in NetAct GUI. The applications are grouped into functionality areas. The following figure illustrates the NetAct application categories.
Figure 14: NetAct Application Categories
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Reporting category The Performance Manager in the Reporting category is described as follows: Performance Manager Performance Manager is a centralized, multi-vendor, multi-technology data reporting solution, providing easy and accurate information on network wide performance, usage and quality statistics. The new easy-to-use GUI allows advanced reporting, threshold supervision, profiling and trending on long term raw and aggregated data. By using Performance Manager tools the NetAct users are able to: •
Create and edit reports, for private or public usage
•
Create and edit KPIs, for private or public usage
•
Crowse for existing KPIs and reports
•
Customize dashboards with tables and multiple chart types
•
Schedule reports and distribute them through email in CSV or XLS format
•
Customize the web portal look and feel and setup your preferences
Performance Manager is multi vendor-capable and collects data from the entire network that consists of network elements from Nokia and from other vendors. Performance Manager includes also several ready-made report packages. The following figure illustrates the Reporting category.
Figure 15: NetAct Applications Categories - Reporting Administration of Measurements (AoM) AoM application enables the PM Administrator user to manage (enable/disable) measurements on network elements to allow data collection from network elements to NetAct. This application can be used to view, create, modify and delete measurement plans and templates. Measurement plans can be used to start and stop the measurements on the network elements. AoM also helps to upload measurement plans from the network elements to NetAct. This tool contains the following tabs:
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
37
38
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
•
Network Overview: It enables the user to view the activation status of measurements in the network.
•
Plans: It enables the user to create, modify, delete, activate and deactivate plans.
•
Templates: It enables the user to create, modify and delete a template. It also allows the user to create a plan based on an existing template.
•
Upload Overview: It enables the user to view a summary of all the upload operations carried out during a specific time period for specific NE Types.
Thresholder and Profiler Thresholder and Profiler are NetAct applications that are integrated with NetAct Performance Manager: they allow setting and managing thresholds or profiles, respectively, for the counters or KPIs calculated in Performance Manager. Profiler capitalizes on the observation that the measured values of a KPI often follow a pattern. Profiler tracks this pattern and provides a reliable approximation of the typical value of the KPI based on a week's data. Nevertheless, the user can define a threshold and a profile for the same KPI independently from each other: if a user enable thresholding and profiling but the threshold is not a profiled threshold, Profiler still maintains the profile for the KPI. This way a user can monitor the KPI actively (with the threshold and by receiving violation notifications) and at the same time user can also gather longer-term information on the KPI (with the profile). Software Asset Monitoring Software Asset Monitoring application collects and processes the configuration and measurement data based on customer specific settings. It generates a report on the feature usage and forwards the formatted monitoring data to the customer and Nokia Customer Team through an encrypted e-mail. The encrypted e-mail can be read and validated by Customer and Nokia Customer Team only. The report on the feature usage is used to generate an invoice. One software monitoring report comprises information related to one NetAct cluster. For LTE and Flexi Direct, software monitoring is the only way of usage control as License Keys are not implemented for these technologies. Software Asset Monitoring enables speed and efficiency with fast software activations through bypassing the pre-activation procurement process, and applying alternative pricing models where invoicing is based on network configuration or on used functionality. This results in OPEX savings and in an increased flexibility. The following figure illustrates the functions of Performance Management.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Figure 16: Performance Management Functions
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
39
40
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Configuration category This following section describes the NetAct Configurator. NetAct Configurator NetAct Configurator is a component in the scalable NetAct framework for operating mobile networks. Configurator gives access to real-time network configuration data and provides tools to manage network configuration. The basic functionality of NetAct Configurator is to define and manage parameter data in the network. Network architecture can be functionally grouped into the access network and the core network. The access network handles all radio-related functionality while the core network is responsible for routing calls and data connections to external networks. With Configurator, the access network and core network are managed in a centralized way. The main functionalities of Configurator are: •
Storing the network parameters in the database
•
Data exchange with external tools
•
Setting, modifying, viewing, and comparing network configuration data
•
Mass modifications on the network: integrating sites, extending and optimizing the network
•
Small scale tuning of the network configuration
Software Manager, License Manager Software Manager and License Manager are centralized NetAct applications for the network management of Software (NetAct and NEs Software) and Licenses (NetAct and NE's licenses). Self-Organizing Networks (SON) Scheduler SON Scheduler allows user to view and configure operations related to Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) Flexi BTS(s) as well as auto connection and auto configuration features both in the network and planned configuration. SON Scheduler functionality manages the four following features in Long-Term Evolution (LTE) networks: •
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Conflict Resolution
•
Mobility Robustness
•
Synchronization of Inter-Radio Access Technologies (RAT) Neighbors
•
Optimization of Intra LTE Neighbor Relations
It provides advanced filtering options to improve displaying required information as well as an array of scheduling options. Plan Editor Plan Editor allows the user to edit radio network plans offline, making it possible to modify all network parameters locally on a PC. Changes to the network topology or either single parameter changes or mass operations on large groups of parameters can be planned in a format that can be used by network planning and management systems.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Plan Editor Graphical User Interface (GUI) displays managed objects in a hierarchical order and provides a drag-and-drop functionality to ease the planning work. Plan Editor includes a reporting functionality, Parameter Dictionary, for online reference and help on parameter value ranges, and the possibility to store several default parameter sets.
Figure 17: NetAct Applications Categories - Configuration
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
41
42
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
NetAct Configurator This section describes the NetAct configurator. Maintaining up-to-date picture of the network Working with the latest data is a precondition for exploiting the full potential of any network. Configurator not only retrieves configuration data from network elements whenever desired. It also saves this information to allow operators create an archive of configuration stages to give them vital insight and thus enables them to optimize their network. Built-in Northbound interface capability allows for the export of data towards third-party post-processing applications. Configuring the network Configurator provides offline planning capabilities to prevent any mistakes to be made on a running network. Current and planned configurations can be compared to identify the best solution. Plausibility checks prevent errors from the start. An Import functionality is available which enables to process network plans which have been prepared outside of Configurator in an operator’s planning environment. In the configure phase all three Configurator components work hand-in-hand: •
CM Editor is used for displaying configuration data and for comfortable editing of data when creating a network plan.
•
CM Analyzer is used for use case specific running of consistency checks.
•
CM Operations Manager comes into the game when externally created network plans are imported into the Configurator application for further processing. With the Command Manager, CM Operations Manager allows the direct execution of commands and command files (on-demand or scheduled) to network elements.
Once a new configuration has been defined automatic delta command generation takes care of spelling out all necessary changes in the relevant network element specific data formats. Controlled deployment of all administration is provided by the provisioning capability. The automation of all download tasks ensures network consistency and minimizes operational efforts, allowing a complete transparency of all planning and with minimized margin for error. All provisioning steps are controlled by the CM Operations Manager.
Figure 18: Configurator Functionality
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Monitor category The Monitoring is described as follows: NetAct Monitor NetAct Monitor provides a new desktop and a new toolset for monitoring tasks. The fault management monitoring tools in NetAct Monitor can be used to manage alarms from various network elements and types, to perform root cause analysis, to troubleshoot faults that cause disruptions in network services, and to improve the quality of the network services for subscribers. NetAct Monitor provides: •
List and view based alarm monitoring
•
Object management tools
•
Rule management for automated alarm handling and correlation
•
Alarm filtering
•
Alarm forwarding to e-mail
•
Trouble Ticket management tools
•
OSS/J Trouble Ticket Northbound interface
•
3GPP CORBA Fault Management Northbound interface
•
Application launch for all NetAct tools, including NetAct OSS5 level applications
NetAct Monitor toolset accelerates the monitoring workflow by providing centralized monitoring tools on a single screen for different networks. Alarm filtering and correlation rules help to automate the regular fault management actions and reduce the alarm flow to NetAct Monitor alarm tools and upper level systems integrated through 3GPP CORBA Fault Management Northbound interface. OSS/J Trouble Ticket interface together with trouble ticket tools enhances the trouble ticket handling within monitoring tools. NetAct Monitor supports user specific customization on tool views and tool set-ups and its permission management supports user group specific tool and operation permissions. With this integrated toolset NetAct Monitor provides excellent support for daily monitoring tasks in operations helping operator to gain OPEX savings when tools are in full use.
Figure 20: NetAct Applications Categories - Monitoring The following figure illustrates the Alarm Report Dashboard.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
43
44
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 21: Monitoring Category: Alarm Reports Dashboard The following figure illustrates the troubleshooting with monitor tools.
Figure 22: Troubleshooting with Monitor Tools Trace Viewer Tracing is a concept name for an optional NetAct functionality, which is performed by the TraceViewer application, and allows the tracing of mobile equipment and subscribers in mobile networks. TraceViewer enables global tracing, which means that a user can trace an International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number or International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) number throughout the network. Additionally, the TraceViewer application provides a mechanism for administering, collecting and viewing information related to a specific subscriber or mobile equipment. TraceViewer can activate traces in several network elements, including Nokia RNC, FlexiNS. In addition, TraceViewer receives events from Nokia BSC and MGW network elements. Trace data is collected from the network elements and is sent to TraceViewer, where it can be viewed in the form of reports. TraceViewer can be also used to support network planning and optimization. After changing the network parameters, users can easily verify that all sites are working as planned, by using TraceViewer’s graphical and textual presentations. This tool is also used for real-time troubleshooting to follow the functionality of the network and possible problems with a call.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Operators can use tracing to troubleshoot problems with mobile equipment or subscriber’s connections and to follow up customer complaints. Tracing can be also used to monitor the network and to check the results of the network optimization.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
45
46
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
User Assistance Category The following section describes the user assistance category. Operating Documentation NetAct operating documentation contains the user assistance needed for the daily network management operations. The documentation is available on NetAct user workstations in a browsable format. The NetAct application Online Helps are available in the same NetAct Operating Documentation set, and they can be launched via context-sensitive launch from the NetAct applications. Object Information Browser (OIB) Object Information Browser (OIB) is an application used for browsing of alarm, measurement, counter, and both radio and core network parameter descriptions, as well as object class information and changes between network element releases. OIB user interface provides following functions for utilizing the adaptation reference information: •
Search
•
View
•
Browse
•
Compare
•
Export to spreadsheet or XML
•
Print
•
View release changes
•
Select GUI columns for browsing and export
The following figure illustrates the user assistance.
Figure 23: NetAct Applications Categories – User Assistance
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Administration category The section describes the administration category. Adaptation Manager An adaptation is a set of fragments such as Configuration Management (CM), Performance Management (PM), Fault Management (FM), and other fragments. These fragments contain data that enables NetAct to communicate with any Network Element (NE). Several releases of an adaptation can be deployed to NetAct to support multiple versions of network elements. Adaptation Manager allows to manage adaptations. A user with adequate roles and permissions can perform the following actions with Adaptation Manager: •
Deploying adaptations, Un-deploying adaptations, Redeploying adaptations
•
Viewing adaptations
Dynamic Adaptation Dynamic Adaptation GUI is a web application, which provides an interface to view and trigger the Dynamic Adaption process. It allows as well monitoring the dynamic adaptation status. The network elements integrated via Dynamic Adaptation are those managed by @vantage agent, generic agent or ne3s agent. When Dynamic Adaptation is triggered for a network element from the Web UI, the request is dispatched to Dynamic Adaptation Mediation. After that, mediation starts to upload metadata for the network element. These metadata contents are processed, and then adaptations are generated dynamically. Adaptations for @vantage agent or generic agents are generated dynamically based on the fault management, performance management, and configuration management metadata present on the network element. Adaptations for ne3s agent are generated dynamically based on the fault management and performance management metadata present on the network element. The generated adaptations are then deployed into NetAct System dynamically. Once the Adaptation process is completed, Dynamic Adaptation GUI is updated with the status of the adaptation. NE Integration Wizard Network element integration wizard application is used by system administrator to automatically integrate a network element to NetAct. SNMP FM Mediator SNMP FM Mediator application allows system administrator to activate, deactivate, and configure parameters of agent supervision, trap reliability, and alarm upload functions for all network elements. Parameters as such as timeout, retries, number of messages to be handled and so on can be configured with this tool. With SNMP FM Mediator, you can: •
Configure global parameters for agent supervision
•
Configure global parameters for trap reliability
•
Configure parameters for agent supervision by network elements
•
Configure global parameters for alarm synchronization
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
47
48
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
SNMP PM Mediator SNMP PM Mediator allows system administrator to activate, deactivate, and configure parameters of PM mediation (for example, timeout, retries and number messages handled in parallel mode). Using SNMP PM Mediator, administrator user can: •
Configure global parameters
•
Configure parameters for PM Polling by network element
•
Configure polling for existing network elements
SNMP PM Mediator application allows administrator to configure performance management measurement data polling for the SNMP based network elements and stores the performance indicators in the system. The performance indicators are configured in the performance management adaptation and the mapping between SNMP variables and performance indicators is defined by the SNMP PM fragment of the adaptation. The network elements having SNMP PM fragments deployed on NetAct can be polled by the SNMP PM mediation. If performance management adaptation exists, then the data is used by performance management and stored in performance management database. Map Administrator Map Administrator is an administration tool designed for managing the Geographic Information System (GIS). GIS combines data with location. The main usages for such a system are data retrieval and visualization based on the location, for example, showing computed network coverage or dominance on a map. The following figure illustrates the NetAct Applications Categories - Administration.
Figure 24: NetAct Applications Categories - Administration
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Security category The following section describes the User Management. User Management User management is a web based management system for monitoring, managing and administering users and groups. The user management application manages user profile information, groups and password policies and ensures the security of a user. User management is integrated with Permission Management (PEM) of the different NetAct tools for the corresponding authorizations to be assigned to users. The authentication of a user is based on user profile information stored in the system specific authentication repository. The following operations are managed by user management: •
Creating, deleting and updating user and login profile
•
Creating, deleting and updating a group
•
Importing and Exporting users and permissions
•
Resetting user passwords
•
Configuring password policy
Certification Authority Certification Authority is the tool used to download the security server CA certificates used by the tier1 to communicate con NetAct applications (launch NetAct desktop). Network Element Access Control Web application used to administer Network Element credentials for the users that NetAct uses to access Network Elements. The following figure illustrates the NetAct Applications Categories - Security.
Figure 25: NetAct Applications Categories - Security
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
49
50
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Optimization category The optimization process usually takes place when the monitored performance drops below the set targets, when a periodical tuning task is to be started or when there is need to optimize the behavior of new network elements in the network. The existing network configuration and performance needs to be taken into account when adding the new elements. Measurements are used for analyzing the network and service performance development against set targets. A detailed analysis is performed to find the reasons behind decreased performance and to select the appropriate corrective actions. In this phase, the relations between performance indicators and element parameters are analyzed. After the analysis phase, the configuration parameter settings are optimized and the set quality criteria are checked. When the corrections are verified and implemented into the network, the quality monitoring cycle starts from the beginning. The following applications and tools are used in network optimization with NetAct: Optimizer
NetAct Optimizer is designed for automated, measurement based optimization of operational GSM, WCDMA and LTE networks. It provides the functionality for viewing, analyzing and optimizing the actual network performance and capacity.
Map Administrator
Map Administrator is an administration tool designed for managing the Geographic Information System (GIS). Map Administrator is located in the Administration folder on the NetAct Start Page.
Antenna Data Editor
Antenna Data Editor is an Optimizer functionality used for importing site and antenna relations to the cells and base stations of the actual network. The tool is run by the administrator user whenever new sites and antennas and relations to the cells in the network need to be updated. Antenna Data Editor supports data import from any external system producing a CSV (Comma Separated Values) data input file that complies with the import format definition.
Configurator
The following Configurator applications are used in the optimization process: CM Analyzer, for running consistency checks, CM Operations Manager, for downloading and activating plans and for running workflow-based optimization operations, CM Editor, for editing plans and templates, SON Scheduler, for running scheduled workflow-based optimization operations.
Performance Manager Optimizer uses mobile measurement reports collected by Performance Manager in interference matrix creation. The following figure illustrates the NetAct Applications Categories - Optimization.
Figure 26: NetAct Applications Categories - Optimization © Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Lab exercise: Application Categories Context Explain the purpose of NetAct categories groups.
Figure 27: Lab exercise: Application Categories Procedure 1
Login to NetAct.
2
Navigate to Start Page. Result of this step List the NetAct Start Page Categories. Explain the purpose of each category? Explain the main functionalities of the following applications. Indicate to which category they belong to: •
NetAct Monitor
•
Performance Manager
•
CM Operations Manager
•
Online Documentation
•
Trace Viewer
•
Optimizer
________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
51
52
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Managed Objects Components of Network Topology Topology The topology of a network is the representation of the actual physical elements of the network, where they are located, and how they are related to each other. To get an accurate representation of the network it is important to keep the topology as consistent with the actual physical network as possible. Managed Object (MO) A managed object represents a physical or a logical network element, or a piece of equipment that belongs to the network. This element must be connected to NetAct, so that NetAct can be used to manage it by gathering information, such as information on alarms, from it. In some cases information can be downloaded from NetAct to the managed object. Every Managed Object belongs to a specific Managed Object Class (MOC) which defines its characteristics, such as its parameters, operations, notifications and behavior. Managed Object Class All managed objects of the same type are grouped together to form a class. This enables NetAct to represent the elements in the network in a logical way. In NetAct software each class is represented by its own symbol. These symbols can be used in the NetAct Monitor to make graphical views of the network. It defines the characteristics of the MO, such as its parameters, operations, notifications and behavior. Object Instance The Object Instance and the associated Managed Object Class of the MO uniquely identify the MO within its Parent Object. Parent and child objects Managed objects are often hierarchical with certain objects controlling and containing others. This hierarchy is shown in the NetAct object model as well. A parent object controls or contains a child object. Site object A site is a place where one or more of the elements of the network are located. One site can contain more than one managed object. If there are multiple elements on one site, the site object represents the element which is highest in the hierarchy on that site. For example, a site may contain an OMC as well as one of its workstations. Distinguished Name (DN) Distinguished Name is an effective identifier of a particular managed object instance. It contains the relative Distinguished Name of the object instance in question, plus the relative Distinguished Names of all its parent objects. These are shown as a path of elements arranged in a hierarchical order and separated by a slash (/). For example, ClassName-InstanceValue/ClassNameInstanceValue/ClassName-InstanceValue
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Global Identifier (GID) The Global Identifier is a number which uniquely identifies a MO in the Topology. The same MO always has the same GID in any NetAct system. Internal ID The internal ID is a number which uniquely identifies a MO within one NetAct system (within a regional or the global system). The same MO usually has not the same internal ID in different NetAct systems. Object State The Object State specifies whether the MO exists in the actual configuration (operational or created from network state) or not (non-operational state). Working Sets Managed object refers to an abstract representation of a network resource, which can be either a physical or logical entity, in a network managed by NetAct. Working set refers to a set of managed objects to which recurring management tasks are applied. Working sets facilitate network management, for example, when certain configuration changes are applied to a set of network elements recurrently. For example, network operators often want to configure a set of base stations with the same radio network parameters. In this case, the use of working sets can facilitate configuration management significantly. Maintenance Regions A maintenance region is a logical managed object in NetAct Object Model. It is a collection of managed objects that are grouped together, normally to represent some geographical part of the network.
Figure 28: Managed Objects, Maintenance Regions and Working Sets NetAct Monitor applications allow to define maintenance regions that should be monitored. Dividing the network view into two or more maintenance regions facilitates online monitoring because that way the number of alarms that different groups responsible for network operation need to analyze is reduced. Using maintenance regions: •
The system administrator can create separate Maintenance regions within the network.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
53
54
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
•
Dividing the network view into two or more maintenance regions makes online monitoring easier as it reduces the number of alarms that personnel in operation need to analyze.
For example, it may be useful to have separate maintenance regions for different geographical areas, for prioritized areas, or for certain types of alarms. You can set up monitoring criteria that narrow the focus of monitoring so that they can concentrate only on the network areas or alarm numbers needed.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
NetAct User Assistance Operating Documentation NetAct operating documentation contains the user assistance needed for the daily network management operations. The documentation is available on NetAct user workstations in a browsable format. The NetAct application Online Helps are available in the same NetAct Operating Documentation set, and they can be launched via context-sensitive launch from the NetAct applications. Browsing the content 1. From Contents frame expand the category by clicking the plus icon or doubleclicking the category name. 2. Click the document name. The content appears in main frame. Additional information: •
On the top of Contents frame click Collapse all button to collapse all opened topics.
•
On the top of Contents frame click Link with Contents button to link viewed content in main frame with related topic in Contents frame.
•
On the top of Contents frame click Maximize button to maximize the Contents frame. Click Restore button to restore the view.
•
On the top of main frame click Maximize button to maximize the main frame. Click Restore button to restore the view.
Searching in the publication 1. Above the Contents frame fill in the Search field with the searched expression. 2. Click Search scope if you want to choose which categories and documents need to be searched through. 3. Click GO button to run the searching. The results are displayed in Search results frame. 4. Click on chapter name. The content appears in the main frame. You can return to browsing the content by clicking Contents button at the bottom of Search results frame. The following figure illustrates the operating documentation.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
55
56
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 29: Operating Documentation Operating Documentation: Browsing documentation The following figure illustrates the browsing documentation in operating documentation.
Figure 30: Browsing Documentation in Operating Documentation Searching currently browsed content When browsing the content (publication category) you can quickly run the search. 1. On the top of Contents frame click the Search selected topic and all subtopics button. The Search selected topic and all subtopics dialog appears. 2. Type the searched expression. 3. Click OK button to run the searching. The results are displayed in Search results frame. 4. Click on document or chapter name. The content appears in main frame.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
You can return to browsing the content by clicking Contents button at the bottom of Search results frame. Navigating •
On the top of main frame click the Go Back button to return to previously viewed page.
•
On the top of main frame click the Go Forward button to go forward in the history of viewed pages.
•
On the top of main frame click the Home button to go to the top of the publication.
Adding viewed page to favorites This instruction is available only for Internet Explorer browser. •
On the top of main frame click the Bookmark Document button. The Add a Favorite dialog appears.
•
Type the name of the bookmark and select its location in favorites folder of your browser.
•
Click Add button.
Results page options The following figure illustrates the results page options in operating documentation.
Figure 31: Results page options in Operating Documentation
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
57
58
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Nokia Online Service (NOLS) The Nokia Online Service (NOLS) provides easy and secure access to solution and product documentation, downloadable software, project management tools, online entry and tracking of Help Desk cases, online ordering, e-learning and collaboration tools. The following screenshot displays the NOLS.
Figure 32: NOLS: Nokia Online Services Product Information Center The following figure illustrates the features of Product Information Center.
Figure 34: Product Information Center
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Online Documentation The following section describes the online documentation. Online Documentation: Infocenter and Operating Documentation Library NetAct operating documentation is available in Infocenter as browsable HTMLlibrary. The browser window is divided to two parts: on the left side is the table of contents which can be used for fast access to any operating document, or part of a document. On the right side the document itself is visible. The topics can be opened and searched using: •
The table of contents
•
Search functions
The NetAct operating documentation set contains the documents needed for getting familiar with NetAct and the daily operations. The topics covered include: •
Overviews to NetAct functionality
•
Release change documentation
•
Operating concepts to network management and NetAct system administration
•
Network element integration instructions
•
System technical references
•
Troubleshooting principles
•
Open interface specification
The following screenshot displays the online help.
Figure 35: Online Help Rich Media in Operating Documentation HTML-format documentation is accompanied by rich media (Flash) presentations and sortable tables. The following screenshot displays the rich media in operating documentation.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
59
60
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 36: Rich Media in Operating Documentation
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Object Information Browser Object Information Browser is a customer documentation browser designed specifically for browsing of Adaptation metadata information on object classes, and performance management, configuration management data, and fault management metadata. The content in Object Information Browser covers the descriptions of PM measurements and counters, CM parameters, alarm descriptions, and object classes for the Adaptations deployed in NetAct. Information on alarming, measured and configurable (CM) objects is available via managed object class metadata in Adaptation Information Browser. Adaptation Information Browser is a Web UI application which is accessed from the NetAct Start Page. The basic functionality in Adaptation Information Browser includes: •
Searching by data type (PM, CM, FM, Object Class) and by release, based on the free text.
•
Viewing the description of an individual counter, measurement, parameter, alarm manual, or object class based on search results, for example, viewing the description of an individual measurement.
•
Browsing counters, measurements, parameters, alarm manuals and object classes by release or by user-defined criteria and drilling down to details.
•
Comparing selected adaptation descriptions, for example, comparing the descriptions of two measurements, counters, or parameters.
•
Exporting to Excel and XML, based on search results.
•
Printing of search results.
The following screenshot displays the Object Information Browser.
Figure 37: Object Information Browser OIB Search functionalities To search for and browse measurements information: 1. In the main window, click Measurements.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
61
62
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2. Click the drop-down list of Adaptation to choose a specific adaptation. The corresponding data are displayed in the result panel. If you do not want to designate a specific adaptation, you can choose all, and use Look for below directly. 3. Click the drop-down list of Release to choose a version. The corresponding data are displayed in the result pane below. Again, if you do not want to designate a specific version, you can choose all. If you do not choose a specific adaptation in Adaptation, you can not choose a specific version in Release. 4. Enter the keywords in the search box of Look for, and click Search. Keywords can be any part of the attributes of the data. To narrow down the search scope, enter two or more keywords separated by white-spaces. The search rules are listed below: The search supports fuzzy match. If there is no precisely matched result according to the keyword, items with similar keywords are displayed. If there is even no similar result, no record is displayed. The order of the search results is determined by the priority of the attributes. For example, you enter two keywords for attributes, one for ID and the other for Description. As the priority of ID is higher than that of Description, the searched items for ID are listed above the items for Description. 5. To show more detailed information about the measurements, follow the steps below: Click Column settings at right-top of the result panel to choose the information needed in the drop-down list, and then click Apply. You can also choose Default to reset the settings as default value. Click the attribute with hyperlink in ID, and then the details are displayed in a pop-up dialogue box. Click the attribute with hyperlink in Managed objects, and the detailed information of the selected item is displayed in the same window. Click the arrow icon next to the attribute name to view the whole description of the attribute. 6. To define how many items to show per page, click the drop-down list of items per page at the right-bottom of the result panel. 7. To export the measurements of the page, follow the steps below: •
Navigate to the page you want to use for exporting.
•
Click Export to export the measurements of the current page in a specific format.
•
Choose the format you want in the pop-up box, and then click Export in it. By default, the exporting is in xml format.
•
Save or open the exported data file.
The following screenshot displays the Object Information Browser search.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Figure 38: Object Information Browser Search The following screenshot displays the managed object browsing in OIB.
Figure 39: Managed Object Browsing in OIB
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
63
64
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (1/2) Context 1. List the different documentation references in NetAct. 2. Use the Online documentation for searching main NetAct topics. 3. Use the Online Help for searching for specific NetAct Operative procedures.
Figure 40: Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (1/2) Procedure 1
Login to NetAct. Result of this step List the applications available in NetAct to provide documentation and information about NetAct and the supported Network Elements. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
2
Go to User Assistance Category. a) Open the Operating Documentation. Result of this step List the some of the Main Contents items. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
3
Search for the NetAct Monitor Application and save the corresponding page for the Overview of this application. Result of this step List the steps to do this task. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
65
66
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (2/2) Context Use the Online documentation Rich Media to view videos on concepts and tasks execution in NetAct.
Figure 41: Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (2/2) Prerequisites You need to be logged into NetAct and at start page. Procedure 1
Open the NetAct Monitor application. a) Go to the menu Help ► Contents and find the corresponding help for using Network Views. Result of this step ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
2
Open the Operating Documentation. Result of this step Find a Rich media item to get an overview of the Configuration Management Operations in NetAct. Describe the format and content of such overview. What can be advantages of the Rich Media information compared with the standard html Online Help? When would you use of Rich Media and when you use the standard documentation? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
67
68
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: Object Information Browser Context Use the Object Information Browser application to browse, visualize and export detailed data of the supported network elements in NetAct.
Figure 42: Lab exercise: Object Information Browser Prerequisites You need to be logged in to NetAct and at start page. Procedure 1
Open the Object Information Browser application. Result of this step List the types of information about network elements that you can find using this. Explain how you can find information for certain type and version of network element. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
2
Browse the Measurements for the RNC network element and export the results. Result of this step What are the options for exporting the Measurements List. How can you find the counters that belong of those Measurements using OIB. Using OIB, find out how many alarms can be received in NetAct Monitor for the LTE Base Startions. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Getting started with NetAct
Summary: Getting started with NetAct Module Summary This module covered the following learning objectives: •
Explain the role of the NetAct in the mobile network.
•
Describe the NetAct architecture and virtualization concept.
•
Access the NetAct start page.
•
Describe the main functionalities of NetAct.
•
Describe the components of the managed object
•
Use NetAct Documentation.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
69
70
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Basic Fault Management with NetAct Module Objectives • Explain how to use Fault Management and Topology based tools. • Use the Common Desktop within Monitor to arrange a customized user interface. • Use the Network Monitor Tools to find problems within the Network and begin to find a solution to fix them. • Create reports on the most frequent alarms and the most alarmed network elements in the network or in a part of it.
Fault Management Basic Concepts Strategies for Effective Network Monitoring The primary aim of effective network monitoring is to prevent critical faults in the network and to identify the problems that directly affect the quality of the service, that is, the criteria by which subscribers judge the quality of the network. Network monitoring can be a reactive process where a high number of alarms arrive during a day, causing a lot of manual routine work in alarm handling. The operator can, however, develop a network monitoring process so that it becomes a planned, controlled process where monitoring personnel can focus their attention on the essential problems in the network. There are different ways to make network monitoring more effective. Using Views hierarchies A view is a logical representation of the object hierarchy that includes parent and child objects. A main view visualizes the parent objects of the network and the subview contains the child objects that are controlled by the same parent object. Subviews can be created to monitor, for instance, prioritized geographical areas, workstation networks, or transmission networks. For easy navigation in the view hierarchy, there can be links between the views, for example, from the main view to the workstation network view or to the transmission network view. Proper planning of the network main view and subviews makes it possible to trace an alarm to the correct source of the problem. Alarm Flow Reduction Alarm situations can be anticipated and operators can make plans to reduce the alarm flow. The reduced alarm flow makes it easier to spot the real source of problems and to start working on solutions as quickly as possible. The flow of alarms can be reduced by means of alarm filtering, alarm reclassification, and alarm correlation. Alarm Trigger The Alarm Trigger feature can be used for automating certain external and internal processes that support the daily routines of alarm handling. The default processes that can be triggered automatically vary. The operators can define the trigger rules. Maintenance Mode The Maintenance Mode can be used to block alarms that arrive from sites under maintenance. Alarms that arrive from objects in maintenance mode are not processed by NetAct. This mode can be activated for a managed object or for a managed object and its subordinate network.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
71
72
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 43: Strategies for an Effective Network Monitoring
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Fault Management Events The figure illustrates the Fault Management Events.
Figure 44: Fault Management Events Table 4: Fault Management Events Alarm Class
Required Actions
Critical (***)
This type of alarm is likely to cause disturbances in traffic. You must take action within one hour
Major (**)
You must take action within working hours
Minor (*)
You do not have to take action unless the alarm occurs repeatedly
Warning (W)
You do not have to take any action
Alarm number
Each alarm has an alarm number for identification purposes. The alarm number can have a value between 1 and 99999.
Alarms An alarm is a message that notifies the management system of an abnormal condition in the managed system. The message carries information on the origins, time, and possible reasons for the abnormal condition. In NetAct this information is broken down into different fields. The fields are put together to construct the alarms which are shown in the alarm handling applications. All alarms have an alarm number that identifies the possible reason for the alarm. Alarms are placed into a class that indicates their severity. Alarm Acknowledgement If an alarm is raised an operator has to acknowledge the error condition to indicate that appropriate corrective action will be taken. Alarm Cancel Alarm Cancel is a message that clears an alarm when the fault situation is over. In managing a telecommunications network it is very important to clearly indicate the end of an alarm situation. If alarms are not canceled is not possible to have an accurate and up-to-date view of the network situation. Warnings NetAct also supports warnings that provide information on transient error situations. Unlike alarms, warnings do not have start and end times and are not canceled.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
73
74
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Alarm Upload To ensure consistency of alarm information between the different databases, you can upload alarms from the network elements to the NetAct Cluster.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Alarm Flow Supervision Alarm Flow Supervision feature ensures that alarms from network elements are not lost or delayed on their way to NetAct. The supervision involves heartbeat alarms, which are sent by a network element if no other alarms have been sent for 15 minutes (by default). The heartbeat alarms are not stored in the NetAct database, nor are they relayed to NetAct alarm handling applications. If no heartbeat alarms are raised during the specified period, an alarm is generated and shown in the Active Alarms List. Alarm Types The event type provides more information on the problem that caused the alarm. The following event types are used in NetAct. Table 5: Fault Management Alarm Types Alarm Type
Explanation
Communication
An alarm that is associated with the procedures and/or processes which are required to convey information from one point to another (for example, loss of frame or call establishment error)
Environmental
An alarm that is associated with a condition relating to an enclosure in which the equipment resides (for example, door open or electricity failure)
Equipment
An alarm that is related to an equipment fault (for example, power problem, receiver failure or I/O device error)
Event processing
An alarm type that is associated with a software or data processing fault (for example, storage capacity problem, version mismatch, corrupt data, file error or out of memory)
Quality of Service
An alarm that is associated with certain degradation in the quality of service (for example, response time too long, resource limits near, or congestion)
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
75
76
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Defining the Components of Network Topology Topology The topology of a network is the representation of the actual physical elements of the network, where they are located, and how they are related to each other. To get an accurate representation of the network it is important to keep the topology as consistent with the actual physical network as possible. Managed object A managed object represents a physical or a logical network element, or a piece of equipment that belongs to the network. This element must be connected to NetAct, so that NetAct can be used to manage it by gathering information, such as information on alarms, from it. In some cases information can be downloaded from NetAct to the managed object. Managed object class All managed objects of the same type are grouped together to form a class. This enables NetAct to represent the elements in the network in a logical way. In NetAct software each class is represented by its own symbol. These symbols can be used in the NetAct Monitor to make graphical views of the network. Managed object instance In the same way that a managed object class represents a type of network element, a managed object instance represents one unique element. For example, workstation is an object class, while a workstation physically located in the monitoring room is an instance of the workstation class. Each managed object class can have several instances, depending on the configuration of the network. In the NetAct documentation, managed object instance is often referred to as managed object or object. Parent and child objects Managed objects are often hierarchical with certain objects controlling and containing others. This hierarchy is shown in the NetAct object model as well. A parent object controls or contains a child object. Site object A site is a place where one or more of the elements of the network are located. One site can contain more than one managed object. If there are multiple elements on one site, the site object represents the element which is highest in the hierarchy on that site. For example, a site may contain an OMC as well as one of its workstations. Distinguished Name Distinguished Name (DN) is an effective identifier of a particular managed object instance. It contains the relative Distinguished Name of the object instance in question, plus the relative Distinguished Names of all its parent objects. These are shown as a path of elements arranged in a hierarchical order and separated by a slash (/). For example: ClassName-InstanceValue/ClassName-InstanceValue/ClassNameInstanceValue which corresponds to: PLMN-PLMN/OMC-2/WS-4
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
ClassName is an abbreviation for a managed object class name and consists of numbers or capital letters. The maximum length of InstanceValue is ten characters and the value must contain printable characters. These are often numbers, but they do not necessarily have to be. DistinguishedName must contain at least two ClassName-InstanceValue levels. Interfaces can set their own limitations for the length of the Distinguished Name. The following figure shows how the DistinguishedName is formed in the NetAct Object Model. Global Identifier (GID) The Global Identifier is a number which uniquely identifies a MO in the Topology. The same MO always has the same GID in any NetAct system. Internal ID The internal ID is a number which uniquely identifies a MO within one NetAct system (within a regional or the global system). The same MO usually has not the same internal ID in different NetAct systems. Object State The Object State specifies whether the MO exists in the actual configuration ("operational" or "created from network" state) or not ("non-operational" state).
Figure 45: Network Topology, Managed Objects and Distinguished Names Working Sets Managed object refers to an abstract representation of a network resource, which can be either a physical or logical entity, in a network managed by NetAct. Working set refers to a set of managed objects to which recurring management tasks are applied. Working sets facilitate network management, for example, when certain configuration changes are applied to a set of network elements recurrently. For example, network operators often want to configure a set of base stations with the same radio network parameters. In this case, the use of working sets can facilitate configuration management significantly. Maintenance Regions A maintenance region is a logical managed object in NetAct Object Model. It is a collection of managed objects that are grouped together, normally to represent some geographical part of the network.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
77
78
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
NetAct Monitor applications allow to define maintenance regions that should be monitored. Dividing the network view into two or more maintenance regions facilitates online monitoring because that way the number of alarms that different groups responsible for network operation need to analyze is reduced. Using maintenance regions: •
The system administrator can create separate Maintenance regions within the network.
•
Dividing the network view into two or more maintenance regions makes online monitoring easier as it reduces the number of alarms that personnel in operation need to analyze. For example, it may be useful to have separate maintenance regions for different geographical areas, for prioritized areas, or for certain types of alarms.
•
The users can set up monitoring criteria that narrow the focus of monitoring so that they can concentrate only on the network areas or alarm numbers needed.
Figure 46: Managed Objects, Maintenance Regions and Working Sets
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Knowledge Check: Fault Management Concepts Find the right answer under the following statement.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
79
80
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Common Operations in NetAct Monitor Desktop Fault Management System in NetAct This figure illustrates the Fault Management and Topology Management in NetAct.
Figure 47: Fault Management and Topology Management in NetAct The fault management monitoring tools in NetAct Monitor are used to manage alarms from various network elements and types, to perform root cause analysis, to troubleshoot faults that cause disruptions in network services, and to improve the quality of the network services for subscribers. The NetAct Monitor fault management system consists of : •
FM event collection engine
•
FM event correlation engine
•
FM adaptation fragments
•
Mediation interfaces
•
FM monitoring tools
Event Collection Engine It collects and preprocesses the alarm events. Depending on selected filtering attributes, the alarm events are loaded into the alarm database and monitoring tools at defined intervals. Separate forwarding filters control the alarm forwarding to northbound mediations. Event Correlation Engine It is used to consolidate the volume of alarms produced in the network. The number of alarm events in a network can be higher than the number of actual faults. The Event Correlation Engine combines the alarms that are associated with one another. Instead of displaying each alarm separately, it displays the root cause to the end user. Users can implement operator-specific correlation rules to best suit their needs.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Fault Management Monitoring tools NetAct System provides fault management functionalities with versatile monitoring tools integrated on top of the Monitor Common Desktop. The available views and editing permissions for different rules depend of pre-defined user rights.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
81
82
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Monitor Applications The figure illustrates the NetAct Monitor applications.
Figure 48: NetAct Monitor Applications Most of the NetAct Monitor Applications can be accessed from the Tools menu in NetAct Monitor graphical user interface. Some of the tools (for example, Properties) can be launched context-sensitively from a pop-up menu in another tool. Authorization in the Monitoring Desktop applications Several Monitoring Desktop applications require an authorization process. This process is used to determine, if you have permissions to access the data, functionality, or service. When you log in to the application, the login credentials are validated. If your login credentials are valid, you will be provided access to the application. The permissions to perform certain operations are based on the specific roles assigned to you. Authorization is given by the system administrator. Wizards NetAct Monitor provides wizards that support the creation of different items, for example objects or rules. The following wizards are available in the File menu: •
New Rule
•
New Alarm Filter
•
New View
•
New View Folder
•
New Object
•
New Group
•
New Role
These wizards can also be accessed via other tools. For example, the New Rule wizard can be started from Rule Explorer and the New Object wizard from Object Explorer.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Common Desktop Functionality Common desktop functionality refers to the generic functionality of the Desktop, shared by all the individual tools and the main application window. It includes general principles of how operations (such as copy and paste or sorting) work throughout the user interface. The NetAct Monitor tools are integrated in the Desktop Framework. On the Desktop the user can flexibly change the view that is used for the monitoring. Changing from one tool to another, and finding the relevant content are made easy for the user by context-sensitive navigation, drag-and-drop support and use of the menu entry. Each user can also set up the tools to match the requirements of their actual task and to store that setup. The Desktop Framework provides the following tool-independent services to support the daily workflow: •
Forward and backward navigation in sub-windows for fast workflow navigation
•
Object menu offering comprehensive context related services from other integrated tools and applications
•
Drag and drop support
•
Quick search for data filtering
•
Field information and tool tip when hovering over graphical user interface components
•
Automated information update for object properties and alarm help in case the instance selections changes within a tool
•
Easy and flexible window management
The tool utilization principles are the same across all tools, which means that when the user has learnt to use one tool, he or she can successfully use all the other tools in Desktop Framework.
Figure 49: NetAct Monitor Common Desktop Workspace
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
83
84
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Managing the Workspace In the context of the Desktop, workspace refers to how the application is displayed in the application window. The default configuration of the workspace contains four areas: •
Explorer area
•
Properties area
•
Editor area
•
Output area
Desktop tools open in windows that are displayed in these areas; the default location of a tool window depends on the settings for the tool and the workspace. Tools that you open in the same area are displayed on tabs. Which tools (tool windows) are available depends on how the desktop has been previously configured. The workspace is customizable and you can save your customized settings.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Managing tool windows In the Desktop workspace, tools display their data in tool windows. You can move the tool windows around in the workspace in the Explorer, Properties, Editor and Output areas and dock them in place where you like. The windows can also be stacked on top each other in the Explorer, Properties, Editor and Output areas so that a row of tabs is visible. You can display some of the tools in several windows at once, and changes made in one window are instantly reflected in all open windows for that tool.
Figure 50: Managing the Workspace Moving a tool window •
Click the window header and drag it to the desired position.
•
A preview box shows where the window will reside.
•
Drop the window.
Maximizing a window and restoring window size •
Double-click the window header.
•
The window is maximized or restored to its original size.
Browsing through tool windows If there are several windows open in an area, they are stacked and displayed as tabs. To browse through stacked windows, click on the tabs along the top edge of the tool window. If more windows are stacked in the same area than can be displayed (in other words, if all the tabs do not fit in the window and some are hidden), you can use the right and left arrows to the right of the row of tabs to display the hidden tabs. You can also click the downward-pointing arrow to display a list of all available tabs and then click the name of the tab you want.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
85
86
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Editing data and saving the changes When you edit the properties, locations or other aspects of Desktop entities, the changes have to be saved. You have several options available for saving your changes: using the Save and Save All menu items or buttons and saving your changes when exiting the Desktop.
Figure 51: Saving changes in Workspace Menu items, buttons and keyboard shortcuts To perform a standard Save operation on the active tool, you can use the Save menu item, the Save toolbar button or the related keyboard shortcut. This Save operation saves the changes made in the active tool only. The Save All functionality accessed using the Save All menu item, Save All toolbar button or the related keyboard shortcut saves data changes made in all currently open tools, not just the active one. When you click the menu item or toolbar button, the workspace configuration is not saved. The Save dialog on exit When you close the main window without explicitly saving your changes, a Save dialog opens, allowing you to select which changes to save. To save changes to some items only, select an item or items in the dialog (hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple items) and click Save. When the save operation is complete, click Discard All to exit without saving any other changes. Save saves the changes made to selected items. Save All saves all changes. Discard All saves no changes.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Using the clipboard The Desktop supports copying and pasting data within the application. Some tools even support pasting operations to other applications, such as a text or spreadsheet editor. To place an item on the clipboard, select the item in the tool window and then, on the Edit menu, click Copy or Cut. To insert the contents of the clipboard, place the cursor or activate the tool where you want the data to be inserted and then, on the Edit menu, click Paste.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
87
88
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Using the Properties tool To open the Properties tool, click Tools ► Properties. Some tools also offer the option of viewing the properties of an object by rightclicking and selecting Properties on the pop-up menu.
Figure 52: Using the Clipboard and Properties Tool Sorting in the Properties tool window 1. Right-click anywhere in the Properties tool window. A pop-up menu opens. 2. Sort by category sorts the properties to different categories depending on the set of properties that can be shown. 3. Sort by name sorts the properties by the name of the property. Showing the description area of the Properties tool To display additional information about the selected property, 1. Right-click anywhere in the Properties tool window 2. Click Show description area.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Using default keyboard shortcuts Table 6: Using Windows navigation shortcuts 1/2 Keys
Command
Action
Ctrl + P
Print
Prints the current selection
Ctrl + S
Save
Saves the changes on the selection
Ctrl + F
Find
Finds the required element
Ctrl + X
Cut
Cuts the element you want to remove or move to a new location
Ctrl + C
Copy
Copies the element to a new location
Ctrl + V
Paste
Pastes the cut or copied element to a new location
Ctrl + A
Select All
Selects the entire content of a window
Properties
Opens the Properties Tool
File Menu
Edit Menu
Tools Menu Ctrl + 1
Table 7: Using Windows navigation shortcuts 2/2 Keys
Action
Home
In Table views, goes to the first field on the current row. In tree view, goes to the first node.
End
In Table views, goes to the last field on the current row. In tree view, goes to the last node.
Ctrl + Tab
Toggles through windows that are collected in a set of tab in the order that they were last used. To toggle through the tabs, hold down the Ctrl key and press TAB as many times as required to reach the tab you want to activate.
Shift + Escape
Maximizes the current window or restores a maximized window to its previous size
Ctrl + W
Closes the current tab in the current window. If the window has no tabs, the whole window is closed
Alt + Right Arrow
Displays the next tab in the current window
Alt + Left Arrow
Displays the previous tab in the current window
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
89
90
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Customizing keyboard shortcuts The figure illustrates customizing keyboard shortcuts.
Figure 53: Customizing keyboard shortcuts Adding or changing keyboard shortcuts These instructions are for adding or changing keyboard shortcuts for actions that are located in the menus of the main window. 1. In the main window, select Tools ► Options. 2. In the bar on the left, click Keymap. 3. Select the action that you are creating a shortcut for. The actions are grouped according to categories. Some of the categories do not correspond to the names of the menus in the desktop. 4. Click Add. In the Add Shortcut dialog, press the keys you want to use for the selected action. As you press the key combination, the correct syntax for that combination automatically appears in the Shortcut text field. Example: If you press the key, the word Backspace appears. If you simultaneously hold down the key, the key, and the key, Alt+Ctrl+J appears. The dialog lets you specify only a keyboard shortcut that is not being used by another action. Removing keyboard shortcuts These instructions are for removing keyboard shortcuts for actions that are located in the menus of the main window. Resetting your workspace settings also removes customization from keyboard shortcuts. 1. In the main window, select Tools ► Options. 2. In the bar on the left, click Keymap. 3. Select the action that is associated with the shortcut you want to remove. Note that there can be more than one shortcut attached to an action. Select the correct shortcut to be removed. The first shortcut is selected by default. 4. Click Remove.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Audible Alarms The figure illustrates the managing Audible Alarms.
Figure 54: Managing Audible Alarms The Monitor user can configure different alarm sounds for the incoming alarms in the Alarm List. User can also configure the duration for which the Alarm Sound should be played. When two or more alarms are raised, the Alarm Sound is played for all the alarms that match the criteria in the sound rules configured. The sound stops when the Alarm Sound is acknowledged. The following Alarm Sound parameters are available for configuration: •
Type of Sound: Beep, Midi Note and Alarm Tone. Midi Note and Alarm Tone is supported only in Windows environment.
•
Severity: Critical, Major, Minor
•
Alarm Number: Alarm number
•
Beep delay: 0-500 ms
•
Sound Polling Interval: 10 to 60 seconds
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
91
92
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
•
The Alarm Sound criteria is applicable only to the users who configure alarm sound settings.
•
When the alarm matches both the severity and alarm number criteria, the sound defined for the alarm number criteria takes precedence.
•
The Alarm Sound is not played for alarms if they are not displayed in the Alarm List due to filtering.
•
If the Alarm Sound column is added to the Alarm List, sound icon is displayed only for the new alarms appearing in the alarm list as part of polling. Sound icon is not displayed for the alarms that already exists in the Alarm List even though they match a sound rule.
•
Filter Drag and Drop, managed object Drag and Drop, reopening alarm list or clicking on Show correlated alarms or Hide correlated alarms button refreshes the Alarm List and removes the sound icon and the alarm sound.
•
When an alarm is canceled, the alarm sound for that alarm stops.
•
The Alarm Sound is played only once even if there are multiple alarms with the same alarm attribute (severity or alarm number) for which the sound is playing.
Example When the Alarm Sound is configured for critical, major, and minor alarms, the following scenarios are applicable: 1. When one critical, one major and one minor alarm is raised (after you configured the Alarm Sound criteria) and only Alarm Sound for the critical alarm is acknowledged. Result: The Alarm List plays only configured sound for both major and minor alarms. 2. A new critical alarm is raised. Result: The Alarm List plays sound for the critical alarm. It also continues to play sound for both major and minor alarms. 3. Alarm Sound for the major alarm is acknowledged. Result: The Alarm List continues to play the configured critical and minor Alarm Sound.
For the new changes or settings to be effective, close and reopen all the Alarm List instances. Adding Alarm Sound Rule To add a new Sound Rule, follow the steps mentioned below: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Log in to NetAct Start Page. To open NetAct Monitor, click Monitoring ► Monitor. Open Options, click Tools ► Options. In the left pane, click Audible Alarm. In the Audible Alarm pane, click Add Sound Rule.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Add Sound Rule dialog opens. 6. From the Alarm Criteria list, select either Severity or Alarm Number. 7. Based on the selected criteria: a. Select the alarm severity from the Value list. b. Enter the alarm number in the Value field. Alarm Number range is from 0 to 2147483647. 8. You can enter multiple alarm numbers separated by comma(,). For example, 9255, 9633, and so on. 9. Select the type of sound from the Type list. For example, Beep. 10. 11. 12. 13.
To check the Alarm Sound, click Play. Click OK. To set the sound interval, enter the value in Sound Polling Interval field. To save, click OK.
Result: Alarm Sound Rule is defined. If Alarm Sound Rule is added, Alarm Sound column in Alarm List displays the speaker icon only if the incoming alarms matches the Alarm Sound Rule.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
93
94
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: NetAct Monitor Desktop Context This section tests the students on the following skills: •
Identify the parts of the Monitor desktop.
•
Identify the Tools groups.
•
Describe the purpose of each Tool group.
•
Rearrange the tools in the desktop.
The following figure illustrates the monitor desktop.
Figure 55: NetAct Monitor Desktop
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Procedure 1
Identify the different parts of the Graphical User Interface: Menu Tools, Explorer window (accordingly to selected tool: for example managed object tab ) and Working Area (Monitoring Desktop). Result of this step Which applications groups can you find under the Tools menu? What is the purpose of each group? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
2
Open the following tools (if not previously opened): Object Explorer, Alarm Monitor, Alarm History, Details. Information The tools will open in a predefined position into the desktop. a) Rearrange the position of the tools in the desktop and save the changes in the workspace. Result of this step Describe the procedure. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
95
96
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Monitoring Network Fault Management Workflow The basic requirement for keeping telecommunication services up and running, is a good understanding of the network situation. Network elements contain monitoring and diagnostic tools for detecting various types of fault situations. In a typical situation a network element recognizes malfunction and sends an alarm to NetAct. A single fault in the network can cause a number of various alarms in several network elements. The reliability of the alarm database and efficient network troubleshooting practices form a base for successful network management. Established alarm analysis practices are a part of the troubleshooting process. Faults that affect the quality of service and, therefore, are visible to the subscriber have to be recognized and corrected as soon as possible. NetAct offers network management tools for reliable alarm collection and monitoring. It provides a set of tools for pre-processing, storing, and displaying alarm and event information from the network in real time. NetAct Monitor offers tools for collecting and storing real-time information from the network to detect and analyze faults in network elements and for monitoring the quality of service provided by the network. There are a number of common fault management workflows. Fault management usually begins with routine monitoring and the discovery of a fault or faults in the system which triggers an alarm or a series of alarms. The workflow example below illustrates a typical monitoring workflow and combines services from different NetAct Managed Object and Monitoring tools like the Alarm List, Network View, Trouble Ticket List, Object Explorer, and Trouble Ticket Details. Alarms are displayed in the Alarm List tool. User can select an alarm from Alarm List to display the existing trouble tickets for the managed object or the site. The Find function in the Trouble Ticket List tool provides this output directly from the selected alarm. To display further object attributes, the user can navigate to the object properties in Object Explorer. From there they can navigate to views that include the object and investigate the connectivity or status of the object and environment. After collecting all the required information, the user can create a new ticket, if needed, or attach the alarm information to an existing ticket in one single step.
Figure 56: Fault Management Workflow
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Alarm Monitoring Tools Alarm monitoring is executed by verifying the alarm status of the managed objects, identifying, prioritizing and processing the new incidents and executing the related actions in order to solve the faults. In NetAct, Alarm Monitoring tasks can be executed from two applications. Using the network views, incoming and existing alarms can be visualized directly on the symbols of the affected network elements in a summarized way. Using Alarm List, the active alarms are presented as a table in which each row represents one alarm received by NetAct and the complete group of alarms provides an instant overview of alarm status. With the network views or alarm list, the active alarms are shown instantly as they appear in the network. The context menu functionalities available in the two applications (right click pop-up menu in each managed object or alarm) work as a platform for investigating problems further, providing the operator with the ability to react immediately. In the following sections the alarm monitoring via alarm list will be explained in detail. Alarm List Monitoring Tools There is a group of applications in NetAct that provide the support for the Alarm Monitoring using alarm lists: •
Alarm List
•
Alarm History
•
Warning List
•
Alarm Details
•
Alarm Filter Explorer
•
Rule Explorer
•
Rule Analyzer
•
FM Pipe Statistics
The access to these applications is provided from the menu Tools ► Monitoring Desktop or directly from different context menus in other applications. Managed Objects Tools The Managed Objects (MO) tools allow creation, modification, and management of network topology data. Managed Objects utilizes the concept of metadata that defines the types network element objects in the network and their relations. The MO tools can be used to model managed objects and network topology. The object data is available in the monitoring tools to support the monitoring process with the relevant information upon the objects. The desktop includes a set of integrated tools to administrate and configure the monitored objects.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
97
98
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 57: Alarm Monitoring Tools and Managed Objects Tools
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Alarm Monitoring using Alarm Lists The Alarm List tool gives the user an overview of all alarms that are currently active. The Alarm List is presented as a table and each row of the table shows one alarm received by Event Collection Engine. Alarms are data objects that receive service actions from other tools. By right clicking an alarm it will be displayed all the actions that are currently possible and offered by all the tools available. With Alarm List the user can: •
Acknowledge, unacknowledge or clear an alarm
•
Create, delete, attach, or query related trouble tickets
•
Launch context related external application or element manager
•
Navigate to related object information in explorer or views
•
Display problem instructions in Alarm Details
•
Consolidate using filter or quick filter
•
Select the attributes to be displayed and configure row appearance.
•
Sort by several attributes
•
Manage the maintenance mode of the object
•
Request alarm synchronization
It is important that all relevant information for the ongoing task is shown. For this purpose, the user can adjust the appearance of the table according to his / her needs. For a quick search inside the table, the Quick filter feature helps to select any cell of the table and show only the rows whose column content matches the selected cell. The Quick search option filters the loaded alarm data for a selected attribute using symbols like <, >, and <>. Alarm List interacts with other tools. For example, to view the alarms sent by the selected object, the user can drag a managed object to an open instance of Alarm List or select a managed object in any other tool and select Find in Alarm List from the pop-up menu. From Alarm List there is also access to actions and services from other tools . For example, the user can select an alarming object and Find in Network View to open a list of views containing this alarming or controlling object. To open an existing trouble ticket, the user can drag the alarm to the Trouble Ticket Details tool.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
99
100
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 58: Monitoring the Network Using Alarm Lists
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Special Columns in Alarm List There are three columns in the Alarm Lists that allows a better visualization of alarm handling and alarm behavior: •
Instance counter column
•
Consecutive Number
•
Alarm Insertion Time
Instance counter column shows the number of times an alarm has been raised repeatedly (duplicates). For example, an alarm which has been repeatedly raised 10 times may indicate a critical problem, although the severity is only Major. However it is not clear with this counter alone how recent or old the duplicates have been. With the addition of Alarm Update Time column user can see if the alarm was repeated recently or was it an older duplicate, thereby gaining a valuable insight about the problem. Consecutive Number is an attribute that uniquely identifies the alarm at the Northbound (NB) system. So if a user at the higher management system wants to refer to NetAct and confirm that the issue is still active (and not cleared) on the NetAct side, it becomes easier to compare the Consec Number of the alarm on the NB system and on NetAct using this unique value. Earlier, the user had to compare this using three attributes (Distinguished Name, Alarm Number and Notification Id). Alarm Insertion Time is the time at which the alarm was actually inserted into the Alarm Database, whereas Alarm Time is the time at which the alarm was originally raised on the NE side. Insert Time gives valuable insight whether there are delays between the alarm getting raised and the time that it gets stored into the Alarm Database.
Figure 59: Special Columns in Alarm List
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
101
102
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Alarm Details The Alarm Details tool helps the user to troubleshoot alarms. It provides a deeper insight into the details of the alarm that cannot be shown as effective in the table view of Alarm List. Because the name of an alarm is often not meaningful enough to fully explain its origin, the Alarm Details tool explains the sense of each alarm in detail. Additional parameters like “Supplementary Info” and “Diagnostic Info” are detailed, and unclear value chains are translated to clear text. For inexperienced personnel, an instructions section explains for each alarm what to do next with this alarm in order to troubleshoot it. For correlated alarms, Alarm Details shows the source alarms to the user. The instructions section can be extended with the user own findings to reflect local working procedures. Alarm Details automatically displays the details of every alarm selected in Alarm List. When Alarm Details is launched within the context of a given alarm, the scope of the tool remains fixed. It is possible to launch a number of instances of the tool. With Alarm Details the user can: •
Compare, match and expand alarm fields
•
Add or edit user information
•
Acknowledge, Un-acknowledge and Cancel alarms
•
Drag and drop managed objects
•
Delete alarms of an object and its subnetwork
•
Upload alarms
•
Check active alarms of faulty objects
Figure 60: Alarm Details
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Alarm History The Alarm History tool is used to examine the historical alarm data of one or more managed objects. Unlike the Alarm List tool that only shows current (not canceled) alarms, Alarm History shows all the alarms contained in the FM database that match the given filter criteria. The Alarm History tool displays all the alarms including warnings and canceled alarms contained in the Fault Management (FM) database. With Alarm History, the user can perform the following tasks: •
Acknowledge, unacknowledge and cancel the alarms
•
View Alarm properties
•
Perform a quick search for the required alarm
•
Filter an Alarm
•
Customize the tool
•
Apply a quick filter
•
Add note for an alarm
In Alarm List, Alarm History and Alarm Details, the user needs authorization rights to acknowledge, unacknowledge, and cancel an alarm.
Figure 62: Alarm History
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
103
104
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Warning List The warnings provide information on temporary error situations or alarms that indicate potential problems and unusual situations. Unlike problem alarms, warnings do not have start and end times and are not canceled. The Warning List tool is used to examine the warnings of one or more managed objects. The cancel, acknowledge and unacknowledge operations are not available when the object menu of an object is selected. The features and the appearance of the Warning List tool correspond to those described in the Alarm List section. With Warning List tool, the user can perform the following tasks: •
View properties of a warning
•
Perform quick search for a required warning
•
Filter an alarm
•
Customize the tool
•
Apply quick filter
•
Add notes for alarm
Figure 63: Warning List
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Reconfiguring the Alarm and Warning Lists display The figure illustrates the reconfiguring alarms and warning list display.
Figure 64: Reconfiguring Alarms and Warning List Display Displaying, hiding and reordering columns for Table views To select which columns to display, click the button just above the scroll bar or rightclick on the header row to open the Select Visible Columns dialog. The Available Columns list on the left shows hidden columns and the Selected Columns list on the right shows the columns that are displayed. To display a column, click to select it in the Available Columns list and then click the arrow button pointing to the right. To hide a column, click to select it in the Selected Columns list and then click the arrow button pointing to the left. To change the order in which columns are displayed, click the column name in the Available Columns list of the Select Visible Columns dialog and then use the up and down arrows to the right of the list to adjust the relative position of the column. In the Table itself, you can also click the column header and drag the column into a new location. Sorting data in Tables To sort data in Tables, click the column header you want to use as sort criterion. The current sorting criterion is indicated by a small arrow in the column header. The direction of the arrow in the column header indicates the sort order – up for ascending and down for descending. To sort data by using many columns as criteria, hold down the key and click the column headers in the order that you want sorting to be applied. Your first click is the primary sort criterion, your second click the secondary and so on.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
105
106
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Immediate access to Alarm and Object Tasks from Alarm Lists Users can launch applications through context-sensitive menus for a selected alarm. These menus are visible in all the Alarm Lists tools (Alarm List, Alarm History and Warning List) and provide access to alarm processing tasks, managed objects tasks and alarm processing for the affected object and managed object tasks and alarm processing for the controlling object of the affected MO. Context-sensitive launch Right-click an alarm and select the desired application either from the shortcut menu, or from the corresponding submenu (for example, the submenu for Element Management). •
Fast access to many functions
•
Menu adapts to the context
•
Menu for alarms, working sets, network elements and so on.
Figure 65: Alarm List and Alarm Tasks
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Alarm Monitoring using Network Views Managed Objects in NetAct can be monitored by using Network Views in the Network View Tool. The following sections explain how the managed objects are visualized and the views and the meaning of colors and ornaments in the corresponding symbols representing the objects. Hierarchical and scalable views over the entire managed network are visualized in the Network View tool. The graphical views can be adjusted to the different monitoring needs from network-wide monitoring to object-level and technologyspecific monitoring. In the upper-level views, users can quickly see the general situation of the managed network. Moving to a subview shows the alarming objects. Monitoring Desktop provides a range of monitoring tools that can be accessed from Network View. A common concept in network management is to have views to the managed network that is typically arranged according to the object hierarchy, connectivity, or other information levels. These views can model either logical or geographical aspects of the underlying network. View Explorer visualizes the view hierarchy that has been implemented. It shows the views in folders that can be used to structure views for a better overview. The View Explorer tool provides a search facility that can be used to find views for different aspects, for example for contained managed objects. You can select a view for manipulation or display the different attributes of the chosen view in the Properties window. You can also create new folders for new views or move views from one folder to another. Network View Tool The Network View tool provides hierarchical and scalable views over the entire managed network. The graphical views allow drilling down from a network-wide overview to the lowest modeled elements. In the upper level views, users can quickly visualize the general topology of the managed network. The detailed relationships between objects are shown when moving to a sub-view. A view contains the following types of view objects: •
A Symbol represents, for example, a managed object, a service, or a grouping object.
•
A Link represents a physical or logical connection between two symbols. Links do not have any relation to the managed object database.
•
Background graphics cover, for example, rectangles, polygons, lines, and text labels.
Sub-views can be attached to all kinds of view objects. The label of the view object is displayed similar to a hyperlink.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
107
108
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Loading Views in Network View Context The following figure illustrates the View Explorer.
Figure 66: View Explorer The following figure illustrates the View Explorer and Network View.
Figure 67: View Explorer and Network View You can open a view by selecting it in the View Explorer tool, right-clicking it and selecting Open in the pop-up menu. The Network View tool starts with a new instance. The view is loaded into the tool, and the objects contained in the view are displayed with their states. You can also open views by dragging them from Network
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
View Explorer to the open Network View tool.
Procedure 1
On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Managed Objects ► View Explorer.
2
Browse to the view you want to open. Information Views are loaded in any one of the following sub-step: a) Drag the view with the mouse and drop it on the Network View tool. Information For this you must have an instance of Network View open. b) Drag and drop a view onto the currently opened Network View tool. c) Right-click a view and select Open from the shortcut menu. d) Double-click a view.
3
You can select several views at once and open them from the shortcut menu. Information If a view is already opened in the Desktop, it is brought to the front and not opened a second time. The Network View opens on the right side of the screen. Use the Back and Forward buttons on the toolbar to switch between the views in the same panel.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
109
110
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Network Views Monitor Modes You can view the Network View tool in two modes: Monitoring mode Views are constructed from the view objects and represent the monitored network. In this mode, you can monitor complete state information of the monitored objects. The tool displays two states: •
Topology state
•
Alarm state
In this mode, you can also search for managed objects. Drag and drop managed object from Object Explorer to network view to view all the network views in which the object exist. If the managed object does not exist in any view, a message is displayed. Edit mode In the Edit mode, you can modify the views. In this mode the state information is suppressed. Edit mode is restricted to some users, requires additional authorization. When another user modifies the views in the database, a message to reload the view is displayed and the views are automatically updated. The tools in the lower toolbar are available only in the Edit mode. In the toolbar, you can select one tool at a time. By default, deselecting a tool activates the Select tool and the Move and Resize tool. Some tools are active only for a single operation and get de-activated automatically, while others are permanent and hence you must activate a different tool (usually the Select tool and the Move and Resize tool to switch it off).
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Switching between Monitor and Edit mode Open the shortcut menu of the tool by right clicking anywhere and selecting Switch to Edit Mode or Switch to Monitor Mode, depending on the current operation mode When changing a view and switch to Monitor mode, the users are still prompted to save changes when closing the view.
Figure 68: Network View Window: Switching from Edit to Monitor Mode
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
111
112
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Navigating in the view hierarchy Objects and links in views can be associated with sub-views. This is indicated by blue labels and a small sub-view indicator shows the aggregated alarm state of the sub-view. The labels of view objects with an associated sub-view are blue when they appear for the first time. However, the labels are pink when the sub-view has been previously loaded. You can navigate in view hierarchy in three ways: 1. To open its sub-view, click the label or sub-view indicator of an object. The subview indicator provides a tool tip with the name of the associated view. 2. Use the backward navigation button to return to the previous view. Similarly, use the forward navigation button to load the sub-view again. 3. Open the shortcut menu of the object having a sub-view and select Open and view view name.
Figure 69: View Tool: Navigating in the View Hierarchy
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Network Objects Objects are represented by icons in the view. The color and the different virtual decorations of the icon represent the state of the object. The Network View tool supports the following states visualized by graphics or color code: •
Alarming State
•
Administrative State
•
Operational State
•
Maintenance Mode
•
Trouble Ticket existing
•
Note existing
•
Subview existing /subview state
Transmission objects can be visualized by different indicators for the transmission type. Complex transmission networks can be modeled and visualized by network views supporting efficient management. Context related actions on objects can be initiated by selecting the objects and then right-clicking on them. Depending on the tools available for the user, these actions can include showing all alarms for the object, finding the object in the object hierarchy, or opening an element manager session to the object. The colors of the symbols for the network elements change in real time according to the active alarm situation, that is, the incoming new alarm changes the color of the symbol indicating the network element and a number can be displayed for amount of alarms with highest severity. When the fault situation is cleared, the color changes back to normal. Alarms are divided into four different severity class, each class is represented by a specific color on the network element symbol: •
*** Critical (red)
•
** Major (orange)
•
* Minor (yellow)
•
W Warning (blue)
Figure 70: Network Objects in the Network View
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
113
114
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Topology view objects
Figure 71: Topology Network View The managed objects are displayed as symbols or links. It is possible to group objects and use them as anchors for sub-views. Grouped objects are not managed objects; they only represent, for example, an office or a transmission equipment in the view. Symbols A managed object symbol provides the following information: •
The object class is represented by the symbol itself. If the object has no name, the relative distinguished name is used. The relative distinguished name has the form
- .
•
The object instance is shown on top of the symbol.
Grouped objects are only available as symbols. Grouping symbols are typically used as anchors of sub-views. They are basically visualized like managed objects, but with the following differences: •
The symbol is white.
•
A symbol has no object instance, so only the name is shown below the symbol.
Links Links can either be symbolic links, or be associated with a managed object. A link that is associated with a managed object provides the following information: •
The object class is represented by the symbol in the middle of the link.
•
The name of the object is shown below the symbol. If the object has no name, the relative distinguished name is used. The relative distinguished name has the form - .
•
The object instance is shown on top of the symbol.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Symbolic links can have a label and a type. The icon representing the link type and the label are both placed at the center of the link. The following link types are supported: •
Cable
•
Leased line
•
Microwave
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
115
116
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Object States The object state represents different phases in the life cycle of a managed object. It shows if the managed object is operational and can be monitored. The object states are updated automatically and no manual interaction is required. Table 8: Object States Object state
Details
Visualization
Nonoperational
The object is fully constructed in the The default managed database, and represents either a nonobject symbol is used. network object or a managed network Alarms are not shown. resource that is currently in the disabled state. The resource is totally inoperable and unable to provide service to the user(s). The object exists in the Topology database, but has no actual value parameters.
Created from Network
The object has been partially constructed from an action initiated by a network element. For example, an incoming alarm, performance measurement or an upload operation from the network element covering only a small subset of the object's attributes. This state indicates that not all attributes may have been set and that the object instance may be violating semantic constraint checks. Typically this is a temporary state, which will move to Operational as soon as a complete synchronization of the object with its upload agent has been performed.
Operational This state is a fully-constructed object in the database, which represents a managed network resource that is currently in enabled state according to CCITT recommendation X.731 Information Technology OSI: The resource is partially or fully operable.
The default managed object symbol is used. The exclamation mark shows that maintenance work is required. Alarms are not shown.
The default managed object symbol is used. Alarms are shown.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Administrative State The administrative state indicates whether the object can carry traffic or not. It is automatically updated in the view. The administrative states of the object are visible only when the object has AdministrativeStateType attribute defined in the core adaptation. The following states are supported: Table 9: Administrative State Object state
Details
Visualization
Locked
The resource is administratively prohibited from performing services for its users.
Identified by a small pad lock at the upper left corner of the managed object symbol.
Shutting Down
Use of the resource is administratively Identified by a small arrow permitted to existing instances of use at the upper left corner of only. While the system remains in the managed object symbol. shutting down state, the manager may at any time cause the managed object to revert to the unlocked state.
Unlocked
The resource is administratively Not visualized permitted to perform services for its users. This is independent of its inherent operability.
No state available
Network View tool has no information on the state of the object.
Not visualized
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
117
118
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Operational states The operational state describes whether or not the object is physically installed and working, and is able to provide service. The following table describes the operational states of a managed objects and their visualization. Table 10: Operational States Operational state
Details
Visualization
Enabled
The resource is fully operational and available for use
The default managed object symbol is used
Disabled
The resource is unable to provide service to its clients and there is some correction required
Identified by a red cross mark at the upper left corner of the managed object symbol.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Maintenance Mode If your system includes the optional Maintenance mode feature, objects can also be in the following states: Table 11: Maintenance State Object state
Details
Visualization
Maintenance Mode Root
The object from which the maintenance mode has been activated and can be deactivated
Identified by a small indicator in the upper right corner of the managed object symbol. When a managed object is operational and set to maintenance, the managed object symbol is displayed in purple color
Maintenance Mode Child
The object which has been put Identified by a small indicator in the into the maintenance mode as upper right corner of the managed a part of the subnetwork of object symbol. Maintenance Mode Root.
Maintenance Mode Off
The object is not under maintenance
No visualization
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
119
120
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Tool tip and Notes indicator
Figure 72: Tool Tips and Notes Tool tip For every managed object in the Network View tool, the Tool tip displays the name of the object and the following states: •
Additional State Info: The Tool tip displays this information only if the managed object supports Resource State.
•
Operational State: The Tool tip displays this information only if the managed object supports Resource State.
•
Communication State: The Tool tip displays this information only if the managed object supports Communication State.
Notes indicator When the Notes Indicator is switched ON for a managed object, clicking the Notes Indicator icon displays the latest note added for that managed object in a balloon. •
Notes Indicator ON
The Notes Indicator icon in the middle left corner of the managed object indicates that the Notes Indicator is switched ON from the Notes tool for the managed object. When you click on the Notes Indicator icon, the latest note added for the managed object is displayed in a balloon. •
Notes Indicator OFF
The user cannot view the Notes Indicator icon. This indicates that no note is available for the managed object.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Alarm and Subview States The alarm states of the managed object can be monitored in the network views. Alarm state In each network element the worst-case alarm situation is shown, that is, the severity of the worst active alarm is displayed. Alarm states are updated automatically, no manual interaction is required. In the Maintenance mode the alarms for network elements under maintenance are suppressed. The table below contains the alarm severity used by Fault Management. Severity
Details
Visualization
Critical
One or more critical (***) Red alarms active in the object.
Major
One or more major (**) Orange alarms active in the object.
Minor
One or more minor (*) Yellow alarms active in the object.
Unknown
Undefined alarm severity.
Gray
Indeterminate
The system cannot determine the current alarm state.
None
No Alarms Active
The object has no active alarms.
Not visualized
A small sub-view indicator shows the aggregated alarm state of all network elements in the sub-view (sub-view state). The sub-view state includes alarms from the whole sub-view hierarchy, that is, from all levels of sub-views. This allows the construction of a view hierarchy that aggregates the alarm state of many network elements. The sub-view indicator uses the same alarm colors as the alarm state, the only difference being that a sub-view indicator does not blink, but uses bright or dark colors to visualize new and acknowledged states. Sub-view states are displayed in a small information icon at the bottom right corner of the view object. The sub-view state is visualized by changing the color of the subview indicator. Alarm modes There are two modes for visualizing the alarm state. These two modes are applicable only for network elements or any object (including logical devices) which have their object state as Operational. Network elements which have their object state as Non-operational or Created from Network will not have any visualization of the alarm state. The different alarm severity are mapped to certain colors in both modes. In the Options dialog, the alarm mode can be configured. The modes differ in visualizing, acknowledged and new alarms: •
Blinking Mode The network element or any object (including logical devices) in Operational state blinks in the alarm color when the alarm is new. It stops blinking when all alarms are acknowledged.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
121
122
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
The blinking mode has the advantage of using less space. Blinking is visible only if the color of the network element and alarm color is different. •
Balloon Mode The network element in Operational state displays an alarm balloon showing the number of alarms of the most critical severity. The severity of the most critical acknowledged alarm is shown as alarm border around the network element. The balloon mode has the advantage of providing more detailed information on the alarm state. It requires less concentration, since the human eye can distinguish different shapes more easily than different (flashing) colors. To switch between the two alarm modes, use the monitor desktop Tools ► Options ► Network View.
Figure 73: Alarm Visualization Modes
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Single RAN Site View Single Radio Access Network (SingleRAN) Site view lists the multi-radio sites (MRSITE and SRANSITE) and the related objects with a corresponding summary view of alarm states in a tree-table format. Single RAN view enables you to view alarm summary at MRSITE or SRANSITE level. You can also visualize the RF sharing BTSs and the corresponding alarm summary by expanding the MRSITE or SRANSITE. The complete hierarchy of BTSs can be viewed by further expanding the MRSITE or SRANSITE view. In this view, you can perform: •
Element manager launch
•
State management functions
•
Open filtered Alarm List, Alarm History, Warning List
•
Analyze faults in a RF shared BTSs
The following object parameters are displayed in the site view: •
Objects The objects parameter consists of MRSITE and SRANSITE objects.MRSITE objects, BTSs associated to that MRSITE and the containment hierarchy of BTSs in the tree format. For objects under MRSITE, name of the object is shown. If the object name is not available, then the relative distinguished name is shown. SRANSITE is a logical object which has a one-to-one mapping with SBTS and is a special case where it does not have a name of its own. Objects under SRANSITE follow the usual naming convention (that is, if the object name is not available, then the relative distinguished name is shown). The Objects parameter in SingleRAN Site view has the following naming convention: RDN[Name]. The MRSITE is displayed as:MRSITE-mrsiteId [mrsiteName] where mrsiteId is the instance ID of the MRSITE and mrsiteName is the presentation name of the MRSITE.The SRANSITE is displayed as:SRANSITE-sbtsId [sbtsName] where sbtsId is the instance ID of the SBTS mapped to the SRANSITE and sbtsName is the presentation name of the SBTS.
•
Distinguished Name The fully qualified distinguished name of an object.
•
Max Alarm Severity The highest severity level of any active alarm of the object.
•
Critical Alarm Count The total number of active critical alarms present for the object.
•
Major Alarm Count The total number of active major alarms present for the object.
•
Minor Alarm Count The total number of active minor alarms present for the object.
•
Unacknowledged Alarm Count
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
123
124
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
The total number of active unacknowledged alarms present for the object. •
Operational State The operational state of the managed object.
•
Administrative State The administrative state of the object after object creation or modification.
•
For objects associated to MRSITE, Max Alarm Severity displays the highest severity of all alarms against the selected object and its children and the same will be displayed at the MRSITE level.
•
In Object Explorer tool, the Find In ► SingleRAN Site View option is enabled only for objects associated to MRSITE or SBTS.
Figure 74: Single RAN SiteView
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Site View Site view lists the sites and the associated objects with a corresponding summary view of alarm states in a tree-table format. You can expand a site or an object to view its children and corresponding alarm states. Site view displays the alarm states of all the associated managed objects and their children for each site in a hierarchy. The following object parameters are displayed in the site view: •
Objects
•
Distinguished Name
•
Max Alarm Severity
•
Critical Alarm Count
•
Major Alarm Count
•
Minor Alarm Count
•
Unacknowledged Alarm Count
•
For objects associated to a site, Max Alarm Severity displays the highest severity of all alarms against the selected object.
•
For a site, Max Alarm Severity displays the highest severity of all alarms against all the objects of the selected site.
The figure illustrates the site view.
Figure 75: Site View Finding alarms and objects •
Right-click a site and select Find in to list the alarms related to the site with Associated Objects and Associated Objects and its SubNetwork. This task can be performed to find alarms in Alarm List, Alarm History and Warning List.
•
Right-click an object and select Find in to list the alarms related to the object. This task can be performed to find alarms in Alarm List, Alarm History and Warning List.
•
Right-click an object and select Find in to list the object in Object Explorer. This task can be performed to find objects in Object Explorer and Network View.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
125
126
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Filtering Site View You can filter the Site View on sites by specifying the filter criteria. In the filter, enter the site name or relative distinguished name of the site. For example, if the fully qualified distinguished name of the site is SITEC-1/SITE-1 then the relative distinguished name is SITE-1. You can enhance the filter criteria using * and ? wildcard characters. Refreshing data Click the icon to view the updated list of managed objects, their children and the alarm count details associated with a site. If a filter is applied to the site view, the filtered result is updated upon refreshing.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Finding Managed Objects The Object Explorer tool allows browsing through and configuring the network topology. It is an integral part of the most workflows involving network topology. The tool displays network topology in a tree defined by the Object Explorer. Besides the tree hierarchy, the browser can display the main attributes of the corresponding objects. The result is a mixture of tree and table display that users can freely arrange: the content of the table columns to be displayed can be selected from available attributes, the sequence of the columns can be changed with dragand-drop, and the sequence of rows inside one hierarchy level can be sorted. This feature allows to have all the required information in one view.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
127
128
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Object Explorer Object Explorer displays the hierarchies of topology objects. Starting from the root object, the hierarchy can be explored by opening child-level branches of the underlying tree. In the case of mobile networks, the root object is the Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) object. Under this main level there are central objects like RNCs, MSS, MGW, NT HLRFE network elements. Under these high-level objects, the corresponding child objects are shown, for example Platform object under NT HLRFE. The user needs to expand each node to view the associated child objects. By default, the arrow mark to expand the tree is shown for all the nodes irrespective of whether the node has child objects. This is to enable better performance of the Object Explorer. From the shortcut menu, the user can select context-sensitive actions for the selected managed objects. The number of child managed objects below a parent object is limited to 10000 objects by default. When the limit is exceeded, only the first 10000 objects received from the database are displayed. An additional node is added at the end of the child managed objects to indicate that not all objects are displayed. In the Tree-Table view, the Object Explorer tool does not support natural sorting of the managed objects. With Object Explorer users can perform the following tasks: •
Create objects
•
Switch between Tree view and Tree-Table view
•
Open notes for a particular managed object
•
Navigate to other tools
•
Display the object attributes
•
Edit the object attributes in the Properties tool
•
Upload alarms
•
Activate/Deactivate maintenance mode for a managed object and for the subtree
•
Delete all alarms for a managed object and subnetwork
•
Select the object attributes in the Tree-Table view
•
Drag objects
•
Filter objects
With Object Explorer, you can select objects to be used in other tools. For example, one or more selected objects can be moved with drag-and-drop to the Network View Editor tool where they are used to model a view, or the objects can be moved to Alarm List where the objects filter the shown alarms to the corresponding alarms.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Figure 76: Object Explorer
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
129
130
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Displaying the Managed Objects Attributes Properties The Properties tool shows detailed information about the attributes of selected objects and instances. These objects or instances can be managed objects, network views, rules, or alarms. The tool supports an automatic follow mode. When the Properties tool is launched from the main menu, it automatically shows the attributes of any selected instance as user selects them. This way the user instantly get an overview of all the attributes. The Properties tool can also be launched contextsensitively from the pop-up menu from a selected object. In this case it keeps the scope. The attributes shown in the Properties tool are grouped according to the aspects of the selected objects. The combination of these aspects depends on the selected object class. Attribute values can be edited by selecting the editor button on the right of each attribute, and multiple selected objects can be modified in one go. Modification of these values is subject to authorization. Notes Working in the network operations is a team exercise. Typically many users work on the incoming alarms or objects of the network. Coordination and information sharing between users takes place either by using Trouble Tickets or with the simpler means of making notes, seen by all users. The Notes tool enables the user to give comments on managed objects. These comments will be visible to other users, so that they can easily see that somebody has been working on a given object. The notes attached to managed objects work like a logbook, where the user can for example note down the work that has been carried out during the lifetime of this object. These log entries can contain any free text. Operators might use these to track special problems, changed units and so on. The notes for each object can have many records, where each record is stored with the username and the time of editing. Other tools can indicate that a note exists. The Object Explorer tool can show a column indicating notes and the Network View tool will show a secondary state icon decoration. Notes can be attached also to Alarm. Notes Indicator attribute in Alarm List shows if there exists note for an alarm. Alarm notes are also visible in Notes tool. You can display the object attributes in three ways: •
Using the Tools menu
•
Using the shortcut keys
•
Using the shortcut menu
In the Object Explorer window, select an object. To display the object attributes, select any one of the options: •
On the menu bar of Desktop, select Tools ► Properties. Or
•
In the keyboard, press the Ctrl + 1 keys. Or
•
In the Object Explorer window, right-click an object and select the Properties option.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
The object displays all the attributes. The related attributes are displayed in attribute groups. The common attributes of the selected objects are displayed when multiple objects are selected. When attributes with a common value are selected, then the common value is displayed. When attributes with different values are selected, then different values are shown. When a Managed Object is selected, only the properties of the selected object are shown. You can only open one window of the Properties tool at a time.
Figure 77: Object Explorer and Properties tool
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
131
132
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Alarm Operations in an Object Users can perform an alarm operation (for example, acknowledgement) on a selected managed object and its subtree. For example, by selecting an object and acknowledging its alarms, then all the alarms of the object are acknowledged. You can also acknowledge all alarms of a subtree. The following alarm operations can be performed from the Object Explorer and View Explorer: •
Acknowledging all alarms
•
Unacknowledging all alarms
•
Canceling all alarms
You can perform these operations only if Alarm View, Alarm Operation permission are given and object is within the Scope (for example, MR or Site). Acknowledging / Unacknowledging all alarms of an object or its subtree The user can select an object and acknowledge (unacknowledge) all alarms of selected object or its subtree. Navigate to the managed object using any of the following methods: •
On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Managed Objects ► Object Explorer. Or
•
On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Managed Objects ► View Explorer.
To view the managed object in view tool, drag and drop a managed object from object explorer while view tool is set in monitor mode. The Object Explorer opens with managed objects or View Explorer opens with available view for an object in view window. You can acknowledge (un-acknowledge) the alarms using any of the following methods: •
In the Object Explorer, select an object, right-click and select Acknowledge All Alarms ► Acknowledge Alarms for Object. Or
•
In the view tool, select of an object, right-click and select Acknowledge All Alarms ► Acknowledge Alarms for Object.
You can also acknowledge all alarms of the subnetwork depending upon the requirement. The Confirmation dialog appears. Click Yes to acknowledge all alarms of the selected object. All alarms of the selected managed object are acknowledged. Select one object at a time to acknowledge all alarms.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
If there are no alarms present to process for selected object, the message No alarms available to process for operation Acknowledge is displayed. Canceling all alarms of an Object In order to cancel all alarms object and its object tree, navigate to the managed object using any of the following methods: •
On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Managed Objects ► Object Explorer. Or
•
On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Managed Objects ► View Explorer.
The Object Explorer opens with managed objects or the View Explorer opens with the available view for an object in the view window. The user can cancel the alarms using any of the following methods: In the Object Explorer, select an object, right-click and select Cancel All Alarms ► Cancel Alarms for Object. Or In the view tool, select of an object, right-click and select Cancel All Alarms ► Cancel Alarms for Object. The Confirmation dialog appears. The user can also cancel all alarms of the subnetwork in the previously mentioned ways depending upon the requirement. Click Yes to cancel all alarms of the selected object.
Select one object at a time to cancel all alarms. If there are no alarms present to process for selected object, the message No alarms available to process for operation Cancel is displayed.
Canceling all alarms of an object takes some time to process the alarms. This operation is not displayed in progress tracker. Alarm Operations in an Object The figure illustrates the alarm operations in an object.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
133
134
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 78: Alarm Operations in an Object
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Searching for managed objects Context Object Search enables you to retrieve managed objects. You can search for managed objects using Criteria tab. Criteria tab enables you to define a search criteria for managed objects. Perform the following steps to search for managed objects:
Procedure 1
Log in to the NetAct Start Page.
2
Click Monitoring ► Monitor. Result of this step The Monitor application opens.
3
From the Tools menu, select Managed Objects ► Object Search. Result of this step The Object Search appears. By default, Criteria opens.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
135
136
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
4
In Criteria, select the checkbox against the attribute based on which you want to search the objects. Information If you select Object Class, the list of attributes displayed varies based on the selected object class. a) Select the logical operator (for example, =) for the attribute, if applicable. Information •
If you select like operator, you can use wildcard characters (% and *) for multi character match and (? and _) for single character match.
•
If special characters (*, ?, _, \) is part of the search criteria itself (name or DN), then use backslash (\) to escape.
•
If you are not escaping backslash ( \ ) character in the above case, the Object Search tool would do it automatically.
•
Special character % is always treated as wild character even if it is part of the search criteria.
Information For example:
5
•
If object search is performed using PLMN-TEST/BSC-TEST*TEST\ as the distinguished name, then the input search criteria should be PLMN-TEST/BSC-TEST\*TEST\\.
•
If object search is performed using PLMN-TEST/BSC-TEST?TEST\ as the distinguished name, then the input search criteria should be PLMN-TEST/BSC-TEST\?TEST\\.
Enter the appropriate value or select from the drop-down list.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Managed Objects List Managed Object List is a tool, which displays managed objects in form of a table display. Unlike the Object Explorer tool, the focus is not the orientation inside a hierarchy, but more the information on selected attributes and states of the network elements represented by the managed objects. The health of the network is not only described by the sum of all alarms, which are displayed in the Alarm List, but also by the operational and administrative state of the network elements. The Managed Object List tool display can be adjusted with respect to the attributes shown in columns of the table. The table can be sorted by any column. If a user has the task to manage e.g. WCDMA Cell with respect to their administrative state, the Managed Object List would be configured to show the administrative state of those objects. Sorting by the column “admin state” would show object with disturbed state on the top. By applying a filter to the Managed Object List, the user can restrict his view to show only WCDMA Cell objects. The list gets updated as states change. It is possible to monitor any attribute of managed objects using this tool.
Figure 79: Managed Object List
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
137
138
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Switching the view mode and selecting columns attributes You can view the Object Explorer tool in two modes: •
Tree view shows the icons and displays names of managed objects in a Tree view.
•
Tree-Table view extends the Tree view with additional columns showing further properties of the objects. In this view, you can compare the attributes of objects.
You can switch views in two ways: •
Right-click an object and select Switch View from the shortcut menu. Or
•
Right-click in the background of Object Explorer window and select Switch View from the shortcut menu.
The selected view mode displays the objects: •
In the Object Explorer, right-click and select Switch view ► Tree-Table.
•
To open the Select Visible Columns dialog: •
Right-click the table header. Or
•
Click the Select Visible Columns icon. Select the desired column attributes.
Duplicate attributes present in different object classes of same or different adaptation is displayed with adaptation ID, class ID and release in the Select Visible Columns dialog. •
To confirm your selection, click OK.
Sorting of the managed objects is not supported.
Figure 80: Switching the View Modes and Selecting visible columns
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Filtering managed object classes The users can include or exclude managed objects in the Object Explorer based on the object class. To open the Object Class Filter dialog use one of the following methods: •
Right-click in the background of the Object Explorer window and select Object Class Filter from the shortcut menu. Or
•
Right-click an object and select Object Class Filter from the shortcut menu. Select either Include or Exclude. In the dialog, select the check-box of the object class to include or exclude the associated managed objects in the Object Explorer.
•
When Show release is selected, the dialog displays object class with different adaptation releases.
•
When Show release is selected, the object class selection applies only to an adaptation release where the object class is present.
•
The parent’s check-box is grayed when a child object is selected. The grayed check-box of the child indicates that some of the children are selected.
The Selected Classes pane displays the selected object classes. To clear the selection, click the Clear Selection button. Click OK. If you have selected Include, the Object Explorer displays all the managed objects corresponding to the object class selected in the Object Class Filter dialog. If you have selected Exclude , the Object Explorer excludes all the managed objects corresponding to the object class selected in the Object Class Filter dialog. If a child class is selected, the Object Explorer displays both parent and child objects. By default, the filter is turned off. If the workspace is saved by keeping the filter on in the previous session, the same is applied during the next log in. You can turn filter on or off by clicking the filter icon in the Object Explorer. When the filter is on, the filter icon is highlighted in the Object Explorer and the following message is displayed: Filter is ON.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
139
140
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 81: Filtering the Object Tree
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Object Search The Object Search tool allows performing the following: •
Enter simple filter criteria to retrieve required managed objects in the Criteria tab.
•
Drag and drop managed objects that user can define to view as default managed objects in the search result. The user can drag and drop the managed objects in the Objects tab.
•
Add advanced filter criteria by entering a SQL query in the Advanced tab.
You can enter the filter criteria for a working set in the Object Search window. You can open the Object Search window, selecting on the Desktop menu bar, Tools ► Managed Objects ► Managed Objects. The Object Search window that appears has three tabs namely which are as follows: •
Criteria
•
Objects
•
Advanced
Criteria: This tab displays all the attributes that are used to perform a search. Specify the search criteria using the available attributes such as Scope, Basic Object, Managed Object, Modification Attributes, NotesAttributes and Network Element. For example, you can perform any of the following actions: •
To search for the managed objects that fulfill the search criteria and their respective child objects, click Include All Children.
•
To select the Root, click the custom editor button.
•
To select the Object Class, click the custom editor button.
For the desired attribute, select the logical operator from the operator drop-down list. Objects: This tab is used to drag and drop objects while performing a search. Based on the selection made, a filter is created while performing a search. Click the Objects tab, and drag and drop the desired managed objects from the Object Explorer window. To select more than 100 objects, save the filter criteria and continue the search. Advanced: This tab is used to enter an SQL query and perform a search. To filter the objects, click the Advanced tab and enter the SQL query where /* edit here */ is displayed. Click Search.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
141
142
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 82: Object Search The following figure illustrates the adding information and exporting object search results.
Figure 83: Adding Information and Exporting Object Search results
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Viewing objects associated with a Maintenance Region or Site You can view objects associated with a Maintenance Region or Site by using the Show Associated Objects option in the Object Explorer. On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Managed Objects ► Object Explorer. The objects pane lists the managed objects. Right-click a Maintenance Region or Site, and select Show Associated Objects. If Maintenance Region is selected, the Object List window displays both managed objects and NEs associated with the Maintenance Region. If Site is selected, the Object List window displays the managed objects associated with the Site. You can view the following information of managed objects: •
Name
•
Distinguished Name
•
Maintenance Region
•
Site
For more information on the Object List, see About Object List in Object List Help. The Show Associated Objects option is disabled when multiple Maintenance Regions or Sites are selected. The Show Associated Objects option is disabled when objects other than Maintenance Region or Site is selected.
Figure 84: Object Explorer: Showing Associated Objects to a Maintenance Region
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
143
144
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Navigating to other tools You can navigate to other tools in the Desktop by selecting an object in the Object Explorer window. The following are some of the tools which displays various information related to a selected object: •
Alarm List
•
Alarm History
•
Warning List
•
Network View
To navigate to a tool: 1. Right-click an Object and select Find In. 2. Select the tool you want to open.
Figure 85: Navigating from Object Explorer to Other tools
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Object Explorer Tool Context This section tests the students on the following skills: •
Describe the main functionalities of Object Explorer.
•
Use Object Explorer for managing network topology.
•
Use Object Explorer to find properties of MOs.
Procedure 1
Open Object Explorer tool in Monitor Application. Result of this step Describe the main functionalities of Object Explorer and its relationship with other monitor tools (like Alarms and Warning lists, Working Set Manager, Network Views). ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
145
146
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
In the Object Explorer tool, select one of the MOs and open the Properties Pane for this Object. Result of this step Write down the data for the following parameters of the MO: Object Class: ________________________________________________________ Class Release: ________________________________________________________ Object State: ________________________________________________________ Global ID: ___________________________________________________________ Distinguished Name: ____________________________________________________ Parent Object: ________________________________________________________
3
Create one new Managed Object. a) List the steps for this task. Information ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
Result of this step What is the difference between a root object and a child object in the creation process? Use the properties pane to set basic properties for your Managed Object. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
4
Filter the Object Explorer managed objects tree using the Managed Object class filter. Result of this step Which filtering options can you find there? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
5
Switch the tree view of Object Explorer to Tree-table view. Result of this step What is the difference between the two view types? In the Tree-table view, select more columns for visualization and describe the process. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
6
Insert a note for any Managed Object in the Object Explorer tree. Result of this step What tool do you use for that? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
147
148
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: Object Search Context This section tests the students on the following skills: •
Identify the relationship between Object Search tools.
•
Use Object Search to browse the network topology.
•
Create Static and Dynamic Working Sets.
Figure 86: Lab exercise: Object Search Prerequisites You need to open the Object Search tool in Monitor desktop.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Procedure 1
Export to excel the list of all ONE NDS network elements in the NetAct database (or any other type of NEs available) whose operational state is "non Operational" Result of this step List the steps you follow for executing this task. What is the purpose of Working Sets in NetAct? How are they related to other Monitor tools? What is the difference between a static working set and a dynamic working set? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
2
Create a static working set with all the managed objects in Operational State in your system. Result of this step List the main steps for this task. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
149
150
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
3
Create a Dynamic Working Set with all the managed objects in Operational State in your system. Result of this step List the main steps for this task. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Configuration Database Modification Context This section tests the students on configuration database modification. •
Creating an object
•
Modification of an object
•
Deleting objects
Procedure 1
From the Monitor tool, select the parent object of the object you want to create. Result of this step What parameters need to be filled out? Are any optional? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
2
Using the object you created, right click and select Properties. a) Click on the bubbles with the 3 dots to change parameters. Result of this step Can you modify all of the parameters of this object? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
151
152
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
3
Select the object you created in previous step, right click and Delete. Result of this step Are there any other tools that allow you to change the configuration database? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Network Views Context This section tests the students on the following skills: •
Identify the components in network views.
•
Monitor Alarms using Network Views.
•
Create and manage Network views.
Procedure 1
Open the View Explorer Tool in Monitor. Result of this step What are network views? What is the usage of network views in NetAct? What components can you find in a network view? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
153
154
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
List some of the views already created in the system. a) Select one of the views and list some of the MOs monitored in that view. Result of this step How can you identify the alarm status of the objects in the views? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
3
Switch the alarm mode visualization for the Network Views (balloons of blinking). Result of this step What tool in Monitor do you use for that? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
4
Create a new view. a) Select in the "Views" window and navigate to New ► View. Enter the name and press Finish. b) Select a MO in the "Objects" window and drag it to view. c) Identify the additional visual configuration you can add to the view: text, background images, lines, geometrical figures, and so on. Reconfigure for example colors for background and text, icons alignment and so on. d) Create another view to be linked to the first one as a subview. Information Select the background in the new view and select with the right mouse button Switch to Monitor Mode. The actual alarm status for the MOs in the view is uploaded. Result of this step ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Alarm Lists and Warning Lists Context This section tests the students on the following skills: •
Use the Alarm List.
•
Use of Alarm History.
•
Use of Warning List for network monitoring.
Procedure 1
Open Alarm List, Alarm History and Warning List tools. Result of this step What is the purpose of each of the Alarm and Warning lists? What are the differences among them? What tasks can you execute in an Alarm in Alarm List or Alarm History List? See the context menu for the alarm. What information can you find in the Alarm Details? Explain how to change the order of column presentation. How can you change the number of columns you want to see in your Alarm List? Test changing the corresponding order and selecting different configurations for columns presentation for example using sorting functionality. Export the current alarm list. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
155
156
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
Create and activate an Alarm Filter in Alarm List for all critical and major alarms for the last 24 hours. Result of this step List the steps for this task. How can you filter the Alarm List using the Object Explorer or Working Set tools? What is the result? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Alarm Statistics Reporting Alarm Reports Dashboard Alarm Reports Dashboard enables detecting, storing the failures in the network, and scheduling the report generation. It is for collecting and storing real-time information from the network to detect and analyze faults in most alarming network elements and for monitoring the quality of service provided by the network. With Alarm Reports Dashboard, you can get the report of indicated alarm reports in a specific duration. After logging in Alarm Reports Dashboard from NetAct Start Page, in menu bar, you can access the following graphical user interfaces: •
Search Alarms
•
Schedule Search
•
Schedule Task Report
Figure 87: Alarm Reports Dashboard
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
157
158
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Alarm Reports Dashboard Configuration Context This function is for defining the time period to keep the search results and reports data in system cache. After the defined time period, system cleans the data in cache automatically. Using system cache to save the data improves the system performance, and saves the time for daily report generation. The figure illustrates the configuration.
Figure 88: Configuration To define the configuration for Alarm Reports Dashboard, perform the following steps:
Procedure 1
On Search Alarms, on top of menu bar, click Config. Result of this step Configuration opens as a pop-up window.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
2
On Configuration, select the check box if you want to store the defined alarm search result in system cache. Information When Alarm Report Dashboard gets the same defined search criteria, this option helps to save the time and system load for getting the search result in cache instead of system database.
3
Change the interval for cache clean. Information In the combo box of Clean cache every, you can enter a specific number, or click the scroll button of the combo box to change the number. In the corresponding drop-down list, select the dedicated time type as needed, and there are three options: days, weeks, and months.
4
Change the interval for report data clean. Information In the combo box of Clean report data every, you can enter a specific number, or click the scroll button of the combo box to change the number. In the corresponding drop-down list, select the dedicated time type as needed, and there are three options: days, weeks and months.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
159
160
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Search Alarms Context The figure illustrates the searching alarms: Most Frequent Alarms or Most Alarming NEs.
Figure 89: Searching Alarms: Most Frequent Alarms or Most Alarming NEs To get the most frequent alarms in NetAct with Alarm Reports Dashboard, perform the following steps:
Procedure 1
On Search Alarms, in the drop-down list of Search type, select Most frequent alarms.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
2
In Search Period, define a specific period. Information There are three options: •
Today provides you the duration from last midnight to the midnight of today.
•
The second option provides you a dedicated duration. You can choose the specific time by clicking the calendar icon next to the fill-in box of From and To.
•
The third option provides you the relative duration. You can choose a specific length (days, or weeks) to be the relative duration, and define the end time of the duration.
The maximum duration is 180 days. 3
Under Alarm Properties, in Alarms numbers, enter the specific numbers. Use comma to separate the numbers.
4
In Alarm text, enter the specific alarm text.
5
In Supplementary information, enter the specific information.
6
In the drop-down list of Alarm Class, select a specific alarm class. Information There are six severity levels: All, Critical Alarms, Major Alarms, Minor Alarms, Alarms Only, and Warnings Only.
7
In the drop-down list of Alarm type, select a specific type. Information There are five alarm types: All, Communication, Equipment, Processing, and Quality of Service.
8
In Managed Objects, define the specific managed objects. Information There are four options for defining the managed objects: All Managed Objects, Select managed objects, Distinguished Name, and Global IDs. All Managed Objects is for collecting data from all the existing managed objects. Select managed objects is for selecting specific managed objects as needed.
9
Under Alarm Filters, in the drop-down list of Maximum amount of results, select a dedicated range.
10 In the drop-down list of Alarms in total, select the dedicated range. In the dropdown list of Mark, set a boundary for displaying the search result. The result, which is over the boundary, is marked in red while displaying.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
161
162
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
11 Click Search to start a search based on the defined criteria. Result of this step Search Result opens, and shows the search result. To reset the search criteria, click Reset.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Search Result Search result shows the result after clicking Search on Search Alarms. When searching for the most frequent alarms, the search result consists of alarm class, alarm number, alarm text, NE count, percentage, and 28_days. The following list gives you explanation on each item: •
ALARM_CLASS shows the severity of the alarm.
•
ALARM_NUMBER shows the unique numeric identifier of the alarm.
•
ALARM_TEXT shows all textuary alarm information sent by Fault Management Pipe.
•
ALARM_COUNT shows the occurrence of the alarm stored in system database.
•
NE_COUNT shows the amount of the network elements which triggered the alarm.
•
PERCENTAGE shows the proportion of the alarm to the amount of all alarms listed on current page.
•
28_DAYS shows the occurrence of the alarm stored in system database in past 28 days.
When searching for the most alarm network elements, the search result consists of object name, global id, alarm count, critical, major, minor, and 28_days. The following list gives you explanation on each item: •
OBJECT_NAME shows the name of the network element.
•
GLOBAL_ID shows the global id of the network element.
•
ALARM_COUNT shows the amount of alarms triggered by the network element.
•
CRITICAL shows the amount of critical alarms triggered by the network element.
•
MAJOR shows the amount of major alarms triggered by the network element.
•
MINOR shows the amount of minor alarms triggered by the network element.
•
28_DAYS shows the amount of alarms triggered by the network element, and stored in system database in past 28 days.
On Search result, you can get the detailed result analysis by clicking the corresponding item. The available result analysis are marked in blue. Once you click any of the blue analysis, Alarms Drill Down opens. Alarms Drill Down shows the detailed result with a chart. According to the chart, you can get the macroscopic view of the network elements’ performance, or the most frequent alarms’ frequency. On top of Search result, there are two options for exporting the search result: •
Export Excel
•
Export CVS
To export the search result, click the corresponding icon to choose the format you want to export, and then choose the directory where you want to save.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
163
164
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 90: Search Results
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Scheduling Task List Under Schedule Search, on Schedule Task List, you can get an overview of all existing schedule tasks. The schedule task is for predefining search criterion and indicated search time. It is essential for system performance management. For instance, you can define a specific reporting duration, and make the schedule task work at midnight to avoid the impacts from abnormal performance. Once the search task starts, the corresponding search result is available on Schedule Task Report, and you can get the result by clicking the task name on Schedule Task List. On Schedule Task List, you can access the indicated functions by clicking the corresponding buttons: •
New is for creating a new schedule task.
•
Edit is for modifying the existing schedule task.
•
Delete is for deleting the existing schedule task.
•
Activate is for activating a defined schedule task.
•
Deactivate is for deactivating an activated schedule task.
•
Refresh is for refreshing Schedule Task List to get the latest schedule task data.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
165
166
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Schedule Task Report Schedule task report lists all the real-time reports generated for the corresponding scheduled search tasks. There are two pages to show you dedicated information. On schedule task report ► All tasks, it shows you the general information of all existing reports, such as Task name, Created on, and Search criteria. In Task name column, you can get the dedicated report by entering a specific task name to the empty text box. Also, you can click the corresponding creation time of the search task to get the detailed report.
Figure 91: Schedule Search and Schedule Task Report
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Alarm Report Dashboard Context This section tests the students on alarm report dashboard. •
Most frequent alarms
•
Drill down
•
Most Alarming Network Element
•
Filters
Figure 92: Lab exercise: Alarm Report Dashboard Prerequisites You need to be logged in to NetAct and at start page. Procedure 1
Open the Alarm report Dashboard and create a report of the top 20 Most frequent alarms in the network for the past week. Result of this step What alarm is the most frequent? Keep that report and run another report for today. Has anything changed? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
167
168
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
Click on the most frequent alarm blue link by refering at both reports. Result of this step What object has the most alarms? Is it the same object on both reports? When did the problem start? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
3
Run a most alarming NE report for the top 20 problems for the last week by refering to the objects were shown in the previous reports. a) Run one report for the today. Result of this step Do these reports match the information you got from the other reports? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
4
Run a report using any of the filters, maintenance region, severity, MO class. Result of this step How does this help isolate what and where the problem is? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Fault Management with NetAct
Summary: Basic Fault Management Module Summary This module covered the following learning objectives: •
Explain how to use Fault Management and Topology based tools.
•
Use the Common Desktop within Monitor to arrange a customized user interface.
•
Use the NetAct Monitor Tools to find problems within the Network and begin to find a solution to fix them.
•
Create reports on the most frequent alarms and the most alarmed network elements in the network or in a part of it.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
169
170
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct Module Objectives • Manage the alarm processing using alarm filtering and alarm reduction in NetAct. • Manage the NetAct Topology. • Revise the status of the alarms processing in NetAct.
Alarm Filtering and Reduction of Alarm Flow Filtering the Alarm and Warning Lists Alarm Filter Explorer and Alarm Filter Editor are the tools used to manage alarm filters. Users can create filters with different filter criteria for Alarm lists. The default Filter folder in explorer contains all alarm related filters. Users can add the folders to default Filters folder. With Alarm Filter Explorer the user can: •
Create new filters
•
Rename filters
•
Delete filters
•
Create new folders
•
Drag and drop a filter
•
Import/Export filter
•
Set or unset a filter as a default filter
•
Display filter properties
Figure 93: Alarm Filter Editor and Alarm Filter Explorer
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
171
172
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Creating an Alarm Filter Creating a Filter Filters can be created using different filter criteria. When the user applies an alarm filter to any of the Alarm Tools, the alarms matching the filter criteria are displayed. Filters are created by setting different conditions (using the operators). For example, the user can create a filter which lists only the Critical Alarms. To create a new filter: 1. Open the Alarm Filter Explorer Tool and Right-click the Filters folder and select New Filter. The New Alarm Filter window opens. 2. Enter the name of the filter and click Finish. A new Alarm filter is created. You can edit the filter attributes in Alarm Filter Editor.
While naming a filter, special characters (*, | , \ , / , :, ", <, > and ?) are not allowed. Filter name should not exceed 256 characters.
You can create a filter if you have Create permission. To create an alarm filter with filtering criteria, the user should have Modify and Create permissions. Else, an empty filter without any filtering criteria is created. If the user do not have any permission, the option New Alarm Filter is disabled when you right-click on default Filters folder. Configuring the filter conditions with Alarm Filter Editor After creation of filter with Alarm Filter Explorer, the Alarm Filter Editor is opened in the New Filter Window ready to define the filter condition. A filter condition has three parts: •
Name of filter condition
•
Operator, for example, '='
•
Parameter(s)
To define the filter condition in the Alarm Filter Editor, right-click the Alarm pattern and select a filter condition. A pattern is a list of conditions. Within a pattern the conditions are connected by AND operator, and patterns are connected by OR operator. An alarm matches the filter only if all conditions of the pattern are fulfilled. Alarm pattern is added by default when a filter is created. In the Operator drop-down list, select an operator. Table gives the list of operators that you can use to define filter conditions. Edit a filter condition based on the type of editor. •
While defining an alarm pattern, either the Distinguished Name or the Working Set Name can be used. Both cannot be used together.
•
In the pop-up menu, the attribute names are displayed in the same order as in the relevant Properties tool.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
From the File menu, select Save. A filter can be saved even if one or more fields are invalid, but if the filter is applied, then it gives an error message.
Figure 94: Creating an Alarm Filter
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
173
174
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Activating a Filter in Alarm or Warning Lists The following figure illustrates the activation of an alarm filter:
Figure 95: Activating an Alarm Filter In order to activate a filter in any of the Alarm or Warning lists there are several options: Drag and drop or copy and paste of a filter From the Alarm Filter Explorer tool, drag the previously created filter on any Alarm Tools (Alarm List, Alarm History or Warning List). It is also possible to copy and paste a filter from the Alarm Filter Explorer to Alarm tools in order to activate the filter. You cannot drag and drop a filter if the Alarm List is locked. Setting a filter as default filter When a filter has been set as a default filter, when opening any Alarm tool (Alarm List, Alarm History or Warning List), the filter is automatically applied. The filter name is shown as the active filter. To configure a previously created filter as a default filter, open the Alarm Filter Explorer tool, right-click the filter and select the option Set as Alarm Tool default filter. There can be only one default filter. Any previous filter setting is replaced by the new setting. If the option is selected again, the check mark is removed and the filter no longer exists as the default filter. Drag and drop (or copy and paste) a Selected Managed Object, a group of selected Managed Objects From the Object Explorer tool, drag the Managed Object, group of selected managed Object on any Alarm Tools (Alarm List, Alarm History or Warning List). It is also possible to copy and paste a filter from the Object Explorer to Alarm tools in order to activate the filter.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Alarm Flow Reduction in NetAct If no alarm reduction techniques are implemented, network monitoring becomes a reactive process, where an immense flow of alarms arrive in NetAct from all parts of the network. This reactive job includes: •
Filtering the enormous amount of information that is presented by alarms.
•
Deciding which of the thousands of alarms that are visible in the alarm handling applications are important.
•
Making correlations between alarms, trying to decide which of them are caused by the same original fault, and grouping those alarms together.
•
Finding solutions for the problems that cause the alarms.
These daily activities require constant and intensive attention in network monitoring. If strategic decisions have to be made under pressure, the risk is high that service affecting faults remain unnoticed or unresolved, which results in a decrease in the quality of service. Additionally, the immense flow of alarms to monitoring can set a heavy load on the network capacity. Alarm reduction with the NetAct tools include filtering unnecessary alarms and correlating alarms so that only one alarm indicating the actual network fault is visible in network monitoring. The hidden alarms can still be retrieved from the database for closer inspection of the fault when needed.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
175
176
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Selecting the correct alarm reduction technique Different alarm reduction techniques can be implemented depending on the situation. The goal in reducing the number of alarms in the network can be either of the following: •
Preventing alarms that are raised because of maintenance work from being shown in the network monitoring application
•
Correlating alarms that are all related to the same fault, so that one fault results in one alarm in network monitoring
•
Assigning a higher or lower priority to a particular alarm, depending on its effect on the level of service
•
Reducing the Alarm load on NetAct Database using Alarm Filtering
When selecting an alarm reduction technique that is feasible for a particular need, consider the following: •
Can the alarm be filtered from the NetAct database, or can it be filtered only from the NetAct alarm monitoring applications? Is it feasible to use local alarm blocking in the network element?
•
If the alarm cannot be filtered out, can it be suppressed by a primary alarm? Is it enough to have only one primary alarm, or does the secondary alarm has to be suppressed by two or more primary alarms?
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Implementing feasible alarm reduction techniques After selecting the correct alarm reduction technique accordingly to the analysis before, the NetAct applications should be applied effectively for reducing the flow of alarms in network monitoring with the corresponding reduction methods. The type of alarm reduction techniques that are most feasible in each network depend on the actual network situation. The alarm reduction techniques offered by NetAct applications are: •
Reducing alarms caused by network maintenance
•
Using Informing Delay for transitory alarms
•
Using Alarm Filtering to reduce load on NetAct database
•
Creating effective correlation rules
Alarm flow reduction techniques The following figure illustrates the alarm flow reduction techniques in NetAct:
Figure 96: Alarm flow reduction techniques
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
177
178
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Configuring Alarm Reduction in NetAct The alarm reduction techniques are managed in NetAct with two functionalities: •
Maintenace Mode functionality The Maintenance Mode functionality is available from the context menu for the managed objects in Object Explorer, Alarm and Warning Lists and Network Views. When managed object is set to maintenance, all the new alarms from this managed object are discarded by the FM platform and are not visible in the monitoring tools. In this way it is possible to avoid an overflow of alarms coming from an object under already known maintenance work.
•
Rule Explorer /Rule Editor Rule Explorer and Rule Editor handle the rules for Alarm events in the Alarm Management functionalities. The rules govern the processing of the alarms generated in the network and allow therefore to reduce the traffic. They also facilitate some custom actions on occurrence of specific alarms in the network and allows faster processing of alarms.
The following figure illustrtaes the Rule Explorer /Rule Editor.
Figure 97: Rule Explorer /Rule Editor
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Reducing alarms caused by network maintenance with Maintenance mode When some maintenance work or network element integration is performed in the network and some network functions are therefore temporarily non-operational, a lot of unnecessary and irrelevant alarms are raised. Before starting the maintenance work, the operator can exclude the network elements from monitoring so that the maintenance alarms are not visible among the live network alarms in the NetAct monitoring applications. Maintenance is a state of the managed object. In the Alarm tools (Alarm List, Alarm History, Warning List) and Object Explorer is possible to change the managed object state with the following operations: •
Set under Maintenance: Sets the managed object to maintenance, that is, new alarms from the managed objects are discarded by the Fault Management (FM) platform.
•
Set Subtree under Maintenance: Sets the managed object and its children to maintenance.
•
Resume Monitoring: The managed object and children are removed from the maintenance state and Alarm upload will be triggered automatically. If the associated children are not set to maintenance, only managed object is removed from the maintenance state.
From the same menus, you can select either Set under Maintenance or Set subtree under maintenance. The Maintenance mode for a managed object and its subtree can be activated from the Alarm Tools (Alarm List, Alarm History, Warning List) or Object Explorer. •
From Alarm Tools (Alarm List, Alarm History, Warning List): 1. Right-click an Alarm and select Alarming Object ► Maintenance ► Set under Maintenance. Alternatively, Right-click an Alarm and select Controlling Object ► Maintenance ► Set under Maintenance. 2. Right-click a Managed Object and select Maintenance ► Set under Maintenance from Object Explorer. The alarming object, controlling object or managing object is now set under maintenance. When a managed object is under maintenance, workstation alarm 9251 is raised with the text Network Element Under Maintenance. The status of the managed object under maintenance is set to NE under Maintenance state. The status of a managed object under maintenance can be accessed from the Properties tool under Maintenance Mode Attributes.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
179
180
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 98: Maintenance Mode Resume Monitoring The following figure illustrates resuming from Maintenance mode: Do not forget to resume monitoring after the maintenance is completed.
Figure 99: Resuming from Maintenance Mode Automated Maintenance Mode during NE software upgrade The automatic maintenance mode can be triggered directly from Software Manager tool. When the operator selects in the software manager which Network Elements he will update, he can select also how long he will set these Networks elements in Maintenance Mode, for example, 4 hours. Therefore he does not need to resume the maintenance mode after the software update, it is resumed automatically after the maintenance period ended, in this case 4 hours.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Managing Fault Management processing Rules Rule Explorer and Rule Editor Rule Explorer provides hierarchical structure for managing larger amount of rules in the form of multilevel folders. A folder in Rule Explorer is a container of multiple rules. It is possible to create different folders that can contain groups of rules. Typically, the folders could contain rules that are alike. Folders can be further divided into sublevel folders in order to manage even larger amount of rules.
Figure 100: Rule Explorer and Rule Editor
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
181
182
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Managing Rules and Rule Folders The following figure illustrates the managing rules.
Figure 101: Managing Rules Creating Rule Folders 1. Right-click Rule Explorer and select New ► Folder. New Folder window opens. 2. Create a root folder. a. Check Root Folder. b. Click Finish to save the new folder. 3. Create a second level folder. a. b. c. d. e.
In New Folder window, enter the folder name in Name field. Uncheck the Root folder to browse for the parent folder. In Select Parent Folder, select the required folder. Click Select to save the parent folder. Click Finish to create the second level folder under the parent folder.
Creating a rule A rule is a generic template from which you can create any kind of alarm rule. This section describes the procedure for creating a rule. 1. Right-click any second level folder and select New ► Rule. New Rule window opens. 2. In New Rule window, enter the Rule name in the Name field. a. In Select Parent Folder, select the parent folder. b. Click Select to save the parent folder. c. Click Finish to create the rule under the parent folder.
While naming a rule, special characters such as *, |, \, /, :, ", <, > and ? are not allowed. Rule name should not exceed 256 characters.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Changing the Rule mode Rule mode represents the current state of a rule. There are two rule modes: •
Active In the active mode, the rule is applied when a matching is generated in the network. When a rule mode changes to Active, the rule name changes to purple color with boldface When a rule is active, is not possible to edit the rule properties. The rule editor opens in “Read Only” mode and editable fields remain grayed out. Active rule cannot be deleted.
•
Inactive In the inactive mode, the rule is just present and not applied. Inactive rule is represented by grey color. To change the rule mode:
1. Right-click a rule and select Change Mode. 2. To activate a rule, select Active. To deactivate a rule, select Inactive. It is possible to activate/deactivate all the rules present in a folder. Right-click a desired Rule folder and select Activate all rules/Deactivate all rules. If both active and inactive rules are present in Rule folder, the user can select either Activate all rules or Deactivate all rules depending on requirement. Users can also activate/deactivate multiple rules. Select the desired rules to activate/deactivate. If the selection contains combination of activated and deactivated rules, then both activate and deactivate options are enabled. Depending upon the selected option, relevant rules are activated /deactivated. Exporting Rules Exporting rules helps to store the rule definitions in a secondary storage area. This helps to prevent unnecessary recreation of the same rules in the new installation site. 1. Right-click a rule and select Export Rule. Save dialog opens. 2. Select the appropriate directory. 3. In the File name text field, enter the rule name. While renaming a rule, special characters such as * (Asterisk), Pipe (vertical bar), \ (Back slash), / (Forward slash), : (Colon), " (Quote), <( Less than), > (Greater than) and ? (Question mark) are not allowed. Rule name should not exceed 256 characters. Rename dialog opens.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
183
184
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
4. Click Save. Importing rules This section describes the procedure for importing rules. 1. Right-click the target folder and select Import Rule. A file selection dialog opens. 2. Navigate to the appropriate rule folder and select the rules. To select multiple rules, press either Shift or Ctrl key. 3. Click Open.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
General Rules with Rule Editor Rule Editor allows modifying the rule contents and properties. Based on the definition given to a particular alarm, actions are performed. Rule Editor structures each rule in a condition and an action part. The condition can be a combination of alarm parameters that, when they match, trigger the action part of the rule. Alarm conditions can be expressed in a flexible way so that lists of values or wild card expressions are possible. Regular expression support enables flexible and sophisticated rule design. The correlation outcome is visible in the Alarm List tool where correlated alarms are indicated with a symbol. Drilling down into the correlation raw alarms is possible in the Alarm Details tool that shows the input alarms and also allows their direct treatment as alarm objects. With Rule Editor you can perform the following tasks: •
Add alarm definitions
•
Apply relation conditions
•
Add alarm actions
•
Add schedule definitions to rules
Summary: The Alarm definitions and the Relation Conditions define the general condition for the rule. The Alarm Actions define the Action part of the rule. Optionally the Scheduling define the active times for the alarm.
Figure 102: General Rules Definition
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
185
186
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Alarm Definitions To add an Alarm definition, right-click a rule and select Add alarm definition. An entry is created for the new Alarm. By default, the first Alarm is Alarm A, the second is Alarm B and so on. Each Alarm pattern in the rule should be within 4096 characters. Adding patterns •
To apply a rule, Alarm pattern should be defined. In some cases, you must create more than one pattern for an Alarm. If an incoming Alarm matches the defined pattern, it triggers an appropriate rule action. To add a pattern, right-click on an Alarm and select Add pattern. To remove a pattern, right-click on the Alarms pattern and select Remove pattern. You can use operators to associate different operators to define the alarm and managed object attributes in Alarm Pattern. The following table lists the types of operators, meaning and example. You can use the "in" operator while defining the object properties. You can add one or more patterns for an Alarm using the OR operator. For example, two Alarm patterns, Alarm pattern 1 and Alarm pattern 2 can be created under the same Alarm A, using the OR operator. Maximum number of OR patterns supported in rule is 15. The alarm patterns can be from the following types: •
Alarm Properties: like Alarm Number, Alarm Type and so on.
•
Object Properties: like Object Class, Distinguished name and so on.
•
Object MR/Site properties: Maintenance Region Name, Site Name and so on.
•
Controlling Object Properties: like Controlling Object Name and so on.
Figure 103: General Rules Definition: Alarm Definitions
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Operator
Meaning
Text
Number
Example = operator allows you to define both Text and Number values. However, this depends upon the selected attribute. For example,
=
Equal To
Yes
Yes
If you select Alarm Text attribute, then value can be both text and number. If you select Alarm Number attribute then, value should be only number. This operator allows to display alarms whose attribute value is equal to one given in the rule. <> operator allows you to define both Text and Number values. However, this depends upon the selected attribute. For example,
< >
Not Equal To
Yes
Yes
If you select Alarm Text attribute then value can be both text and number. If you select Alarm Number attribute then value should be only number.
= (regexp)
Equal to and regular expression
Yes
No
A regular expression =(regexp) is a pattern of characters that describes a set of strings. For example, if the value defined for the alarm text is Alarm Text=(regexp) .*net.*, alarms containing text net are displayed. For example, alarms with text internet, network and so on. Regular expression can be defined with all the java supported characters (*,?, + and so on).
<>(regex p)
Not equal to and regular expression
Yes
No
<>(regexp) - operator allows you to define the text which does not contain the strings of text with operator. For example, if the alarm text is defined as Alarm Text<>(regexp) .*net.*, rule is applied on all the alarms which does not contain word or pattern of the word net. For example, rule is not applied on the alarms with text as internet, network and so on. Regular expression can be defined with all the java supported characters (*, ?, + and so on).
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
187
188
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Relation Conditions You can define certain relation conditions between alarms. The actions are triggered, only if the relation conditions are met. There are four types of relation conditions: MO Relation
This includes the relationship of the Managed Objects (MO), that sends the respective alarms.
Time Window
This defines the time interval in which the alarms arrive for a meaningful correlation.
Count Condition
This defines the number of times an alarm occurs.
Order Condition
This defines the number of alarms that occur for a given time interval with respect to the alarm time.
The conditions are combined with the AND operator. In the table, you can find the description of the different types of MO relations: Table 12: Types of MO relations (1/2) Network Topology The same as
Scope A
Any
Scope B
Description
Any
Alarms to be correlated must be generated by the same MO.
Child of
Any
Any
In the object containment tree, the object in Scope A is below the object in Scope B or the object in Scope A is the same as in Scope B.
Descendent of
Any
Any
In the object containment tree, the object in Scope A is below the object in Scope B.
Parent of
Any
Any
In the object containment tree, the object in Scope B is below the object in Scope A or the object in Scope B is the same as in Scope A.
Antecedent of
Any
Any
In the object containment tree, the object in Scope B is below the object in Scope A.
Relative of
Any
Any
Combination of child of and parent of relation types. The objects in Scope A and Scope B have to be in the same branch of the object containment tree.
Sibling of
Any
Any
Alarming objects have the same parent object in the object containment tree.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Table 13: Types of MO relations (2/2) Network Topology
Scope A
Scope B
Description
As near as possible
Any
Any
Alarming objects must be the closest possible instances of the object class to each other in the managed object hierarchy. The relation checks if an alarming object is close enough to the other alarming object to allow the correlation.
Connecting to
PCM
BCF / BTS / TRX
The PCM card carries a TRX signaling link used by the BCF, BTS, or TRX.
Connected by
BCF / BTS / TRX
PCM
The PCM card carries a TRX signaling link used by the BCF, BTS, or TRX.
Any
In the object containment tree, the object in Scope A is directly below the object in Scope B.In the object containment tree, all the objects in Scope A are directly below the objects in Scope B.
Any
In the object containment tree, the object in Scope B is directly below the object in Scope A.
Any
In the object containment tree, all the objects in Scope A are directly below the objects in Scope B.
Any
In the object containment tree, the object in Scope A has no relation to the object in Scope B
All direct child of
Direct parent of
Direct child of
Independent of
Any
Any
Any
Any
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
189
190
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 104: General Rules Definition: Relation Conditions
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Actions When an alarm definition matches with an alarm, some specific action is triggered accordingly with the "actions" definition of the rule. The following are the possible alarm actions: •
Compressing an alarm When a single fault causes series of multiple occurrences of same alarm, then you can create a compression rule. You can see only one Alarm, despite the multiple occurrences of the same Alarm.
•
Suppressing an alarm
•
Creating a new alarm You can create a new Alarm for the current MO within the range 0 to 2147483647 with user definable texts and severity for the same object.
•
Defining informing delay The informing delay action is executed if an Alarm arrives, that fulfils the criteria defined for the Alarm delay. This action takes precedence, when defined with filter toggle Alarm having same Alarm patterns.
•
Canceling an alarm immediately You can cancel an Alarm immediately by a correlation rule. These Alarms are stored in the database. They can also trigger other rules, such as counting.
•
Filtering an alarm The Filter Alarm action compares the defined Alarm definitions in the rule with the Alarm coming from the network and filters them from database, user interface, Alarm correlation server and North Mediation Target.
•
Reclassifying an alarm Reclassify Alarm action allows you to reclassify the Alarms from existing state. For example, from MINOR to CRITICAL.
•
Automatically acknowledging an alarm The Alarm coming from the network is acknowledged automatically.
•
Acknowledging with cancel alarm The Ack With Cancel action compares the defined Alarm definitions with the Alarm coming from the network and acknowledges the cancel Alarm automatically.
•
Triggering a rule The Alarm Trigger Rule action compares the defined Alarm definitions with the Alarm coming from the network and triggers the process.
•
Forwarding an alarm to email The Forward Alarm to email action compares the defined Alarm definitions with the Alarm coming from the network and forwards it to the e-mail addresses in the specified format.
•
Filtering a toggle alarm This action is executed if an Alarm fulfils the defined criteria and toggles at least a configurable number of times within a configurable time interval. However, when the alarm settles down for a configurable time, it is no longer shown as active.
•
Filtering a threshold alarm This action is executed if an Alarm fulfils the defined criteria and occurs less than a configurable number of times within a configurable time interval.
•
Delayed auto clear rule
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
191
192
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
An equivalent of that in Monitor is the Count rule. However, there is a small difference in the behavior of Count rule. In Count rule, even the canceled secondary alarms are counted when raising the new alarm (root cause alarm). This is not an incorrect behavior because the intention of the count rule is to get a statistical idea about the number of times a certain alarm is appearing in a time window. The Delayed Suppression rule will raise the new alarm only when n number of alarms are actually active. That is, when certain secondary alarm instances are canceled, they are removed from the counting. •
Text modulation alarm Text modulation rule allows you to modify the alarm text attributes. In some cases the operator would like to modify the text of an alarm. For instance, the operator would like to send some special instruction through the Alarm Text to Northbound so that the operator at the Network Operations Center (NOC) can quickly identify the special instruction from the alarm text without having to look into the alarm details or opening the alarm manual page on the NetAct side.
Figure 105: General Rules Definition: Actions
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Scheduling Definitions Optionally, you can set schedule definitions for your rule. Once activated, the rule will follow the schedule. Without schedule, the rule will permanently be activated until manual deactivation occurs. There scheduling definition options are: Start Date
Defines the start date for scheduling the rule.
Stop Date
Defines the stop date for scheduling the rule.
Start Time (hh24:mi:ss)
Defines the start time for scheduling the rule. It should be entered in hh24:mi:ss format. Incorrect format is indicated by yellow background in the text area
Stop Time (hh24:mi:ss)
Defines the stop time for scheduling the rule. It should be entered in hh24:mi:ss format. Incorrect format is indicated by yellow background in the text area.
Schedule Days
Defines the day for scheduling the rule.
Schedule Type
Defines the scheduling type whether Daily or Continuous for the rule.
Daily
When Daily is selected, it includes all the scheduling parameters like Start/Stop Date, Start/Stop Time, Days if mentioned.
Continuous
When Continuous is selected, it includes only the Start/Stop date mentioned and ignores Start/Stop Time, Days even if mentioned.
Figure 106: General Rules Definition: Scheduling Definitions
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
193
194
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Predefined Correlation Rules In a network, one fault can generate multiple alarms. Due to this, it is not easy to find the real fault in network monitoring. Operator can see all the alarms in Alarm List, but it is difficult to make immediate associations between them. Alarm correlation helps to recognize the real problem and taking immediate actions when necessary. Alarms that are associated with each other are correlated and as a result of this, only fewer alarms are visible in alarm handling applications. The following figure indicates how the alarms that originate from the same fault situation can be associated and correlated to make only one alarm visible. There are three cases of correlation rules: •
Compression Rule This rule allows to group multiple occurrences of the same alarm for the same Managed Object. If this rule is set, the user can view only one despite the multiple occurrences of the alarm.
•
Suppression Rule When a fault in the network generates a series of alarms, setting the Suppression Rule allows to view only high priority alarms or primary alarms.
•
Count Rule The number of occurrences of an alarm can be restricted by using the Count Rule. If the number of occurrences of the alarm in a certain time frame is more than the count, a new alarm is generated. This rule can be applied to an alarm that occurs repeatedly in a short time period.
All the correlation rules support backward correlation.
Figure 107: Predefined Rules: Alarm Correlation Cases 1/2
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Figure 108: Predefined Rules: Alarm Correlation Cases 2/2
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
195
196
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Other Predefined Rules The other predefined rules are as follows: •
Toggle Rule If an alarm which meets a user-configurable attributes condition toggles, the monitoring application displays its raising immediately and remains active as long as it toggles. User-configurable attribute condition is an attribute condition that specifies the kind of alarms to be considered by the rule. Toggle rule applies to an alarm which occurs for configurable number of times, within a configurable time interval. It exits the toggling state if it remains stable for another configurable time interval.
•
Threshold Rule Threshold rule filters an alarm which arrives at least a user-configurable number of times within a user-configurable time interval. Original alarms are not displayed until it occurred threshold times. User-configurable attribute condition is an attribute condition that specifies the kind of alarms to be considered by the rule. Filter those alarms of the NE Soho_B12345 which report a clock switch to holdover mode, unless they occurred at least 3 times in 10 minutes. In case of threshold rule the alarms are not displayed until it reaches the threshold limit, but in case of count rule the original alarms are displayed until the threshold is met.
•
Informing Delay Rule Informing delay rule allows you to delay alarms as per your time definition before they are shown in monitoring applications. If you cancel the alarm within the defined time, the alarm is not forwarded to the pipe, however, it is inserted directly into the database. This reduces the load as the data required for off-line analysis remains consistent.
•
Filtering Rule Some insignificant alarms are not sent to a specified target in the fault management system. Such alarms are filtered using filtering rule. Using filtering rule, alarms can be filtered from the User Interface (UI), Database, Alarm correlation server and North Mediation Target.
•
Reclassification Rule Some alarms are more or less critical than the reported criticality and the criticality of the alarm should be changed. Such alarms are reclassified using reclassification rule. Using reclassification rule, new classifications for alarms can be done by either raising or reducing the severity.
•
AutoAck Rule Accordingly to specific network conditions, some alarms do not require operator acknowledgement. These alarms are required to be acknowledged automatically and can be auto-acknowledged using autoack rule. Warnings are always auto-acknowledged by default. Using autoack rule, alarms can be automatically acknowledged.
•
AckwithCancel Rule
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Some unacknowledged cancels do not require attention and should be automatically acknowledged. Such unacknowledged alarms are autoacknowledged using ackwithcancel rule. Using ackwithcancel rule, alarms for which the network element has already generated a cancel can be automatically acknowledged. This reduces the amount of manual work in network monitoring. Active alarms can also be canceled manually. •
Trigger Rule On arrival of some alarms a custom action should be triggered either to notify the problem to the operator or resolve the problem automatically. This triggering operation of alarms is done using trigger rule. The system triggers the specified alarm when you enter the variable, execute command and maximum number of simultaneous processes. Trigger Rule is used to automate an often repeated action in response to alarm events – For example, running a script which does the required actions for the troubleshooting activities. It works on Alarm New events, that is, when a new alarm is raised or when the Alarms are canceled. There are valid requirements to also enable trigger rule for alarm cancel events, so that some actions are carried out during alarm cancel. With this, operator saves time spent on manual actions that are required after an alarm is canceled. Examples of actions which can be taken on alarm cancel are: •
Firing a script which will do some cleanup actions.
•
Script which will close any Trouble Ticket which has this particular alarm attached as the last alarm.
Figure 109: Predefined Rules: Triggering Rule •
Forward To Email Rule Some alarms are required to be sent to interested e-mail recipients. This forwarding operation of alarms is done using ForwardToEmail rule.The system sends an e-mail to the respective recipients, when you enter the recipient e-mail ID and mail content in the Forward To Email rule.
•
Delayed Auto-Clear Rule DelayedAutoClear alarm allows clearing the alarms when the required alarm criteria is matched as per the time and threshold count definition. This helps to reduce load on the system when similar kind of alarms are received continuously.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
197
198
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
You can edit the rules if Modify, Create and Delete permissions are given. For more information on editing a rule, adding and action definitions, adding relation conditions and adding scheduling definitions, see Rule Editor Help.
Figure 110: Predefined Rules: Compression Rule
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Rule Analyzer Rule Analyzer allows determining whether an alarm with a given set of attributes would match a rule or not. With Rule Analyzer you can perform the following tasks: •
Search for rules by defining the required alarm property such as alarm number, alarm severity and so on.
•
Select and open the matching rules in Rule Explorer and Rule Editor.
•
Perform quick search operation using Ctrl+ F.
Rule Analyzer displays the following rule details: •
Rule ID: Indicates the unique ID of a rule.
•
Rule Name: Indicates the rule name as seen in Rule Editor.
•
Rule Path: Indicates the path of the rule as seen in Rule Explorer. For example, In Rule Explorer if you have rule X under folder folder1/subfolder1, then the rule path will befolder1/subfolder1/X.
•
Action Type: Indicates the action type of a rule participating in the search operation. Examples for action types: •
Compress alarm
•
Suppress alarm
•
Informing delay
•
Forward alarm
•
Auto Ack alarm
•
Rule Status: Indicates if the rule is active or inactive.
•
Rule Match Can have a value of COMPLETE or PARTIAL. Example for Rule match, Consider a rule with the following alarm properties: {alarmNumber = 123,alarmText = "communication failure",alarmType="COMMUNICATION OR ENVIRONMENTAL",severity="MAJOR or CRITICAL"} COMPLETE: If the rule criteria match the search attributes completely, then the match is termed as COMPLETE.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
199
200
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 111: Rule Analyzer
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Rule Explorer and Rule Editor Context The students test the skills to differentiate the different cases for: •
Alarm reduction
•
Alarm forwarding
•
Alarm triggering in NetAct
Use Rule Explorer and Rule Editor to manage different alarm processing rules.
Figure 112: Lab exercise: Rule Explorer and Rule Editor Procedure 1
Open the Rule Explorer tool in Monitor. Result of this step How can you differentiate between active and inactive rules in the Rule Explorer? Can you modify an active rule? What is correlation? What are the three cases for correlations in NetAct and describe each case? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
201
202
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
Create a new alarm (using a rule type: rule) with the severity MINOR for the alarm numbers 35011, 35007 and 35005 with a certain alarm number (for example 39000). Information If one of the directory servers is down several critical alarms are produced from corresponding directory servers. Result of this step Describe the procedure. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
3
Create an Alarm Forwarding rule that forwards all critical alarms from NT HLRFE managed object (or other available MO) on Sundays to a certain Email address. Activate the rule in Rule Editor. Result of this step Describe the procedure. ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Alarm Filters Context The aim of this exercise is to create a filter to display only critical alarms from BSC/RNC.
Prerequisites •
Log in to NetAct. Select Monitoring. Start the Monitor tool.
•
Open Tools ► Monitoring Desktop ► Alarm Filter Explorer.
Use parameters given by the instructor. Procedure 1
In the Alarm Filter Explorer, right click the alarm folder and select New Filter.
2
Enter the name of the new filter and select Finish.
3
Right-click in the Alarm pattern field and select Severity.
4
In the pull down menu select critical Right-click in the Alarm pattern field and select Object Class.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
203
204
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
5
In the pull down menu select BSCC/RNC and Add. Information If your network element is BSC, select BSCC. If your network element is RNC, select RNC.
6
Press OK.
7
Select File ► Save all.
8
Test your filter by dragging and dropping it into one of the Alarm Lists.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Alarm Rules Context This Lab exercise access the students to work with alarm rules.
Figure 114: Lab exercise: Alarm Rules Prerequisites •
Log in to NetAct. Select Monitoring. Start the Monitor tool.
•
Open Tools ► Monitoring Desktop ► Rule Explorer.
Use parameters given by the instructor. Procedure 1
Create an Alarm Forwarding rule that forwards all critical alarms from BCF/WBTS managed object (or other available MO) on Sundays to a certain email address.
2
Activate the rule in the Rule Editor. Information Right click in Alarm definitions, Relation Conditions and Actions to view the available options and select the right options when creating the rule.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
205
206
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Topology Management Managing Network Views Hierarchical and scalable views over the entire managed network are visualized in the Network View tool. The graphical views can be adjusted to the different monitoring needs from network-wide monitoring to object-level and technologyspecific monitoring. In the upper-level views, users can quickly see the general situation of the managed network. Moving to a sub-view shows the alarming objects. Monitoring Desktop provides a range of monitoring tools that can be accessed from Network View. A common concept in network management is to have views to the managed network that is typically arranged according to the object hierarchy, connectivity, or other information levels. These views can model either logical or geographical aspects of the underlying network. View Explorer visualizes the view hierarchy that has been implemented. It shows the views in folders that can be used to structure views for a better overview. The View Explorer tool provides a search facility that can be used to find views for different aspects, for example for contained managed objects. You can select a view for manipulation or display the different attributes of the chosen view in the Properties window. You can also create new folders for new views or move views from one folder to another. The sections covered in the next topics are as follows: •
Network Views Monitor Modes
•
Creating and Editing Network Views
•
Adding a link between two objects
•
Linking and unlinking a sub-view
•
Adding new symbols, background graphics and background images
•
Saving a view
•
Creating Children Objects’ Subviews
•
Automatic View Generation
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Network Views Monitor Modes You can view the Network View tool in two modes: •
Monitoring mode Views are constructed from the view objects and represent the monitored network. In this mode, you can monitor complete state information of the monitored objects. The tool displays two states: •
Topology state
•
Alarm state
In this mode, you can also search for managed objects. Drag and drop managed object from Object Explorer to network view to view all the network views in which the object exist. If the managed object does not exist in any view, a message is displayed. •
Edit mode In the Edit mode, you can modify the views. In this mode the state information is suppressed. Edit mode is restricted to some users, requires additional authorization. When another user modifies the views in the database, a message to reload the view is displayed and the views are automatically updated.
The tools in the lower toolbar are available only in the Edit mode. In the toolbar, you can select one tool at a time. By default, deselecting a tool activates the Select tool and the Move and Resize tool. Some tools are active only for a single operation and get de-activated automatically, while others are permanent and hence you must activate a different tool (usually the Select tool and the Move and Resize tool to switch it off. Switching between Monitor and Edit mode Open the shortcut menu of the tool by right clicking anywhere and selecting Switch to Edit Mode or Switch to Monitor Mode, depending on the current operation mode. When changing a view and switch to Monitor mode, the users are still prompted to save changes when closing the view.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
207
208
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 116: Network View Window
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Creating and Editing Network Views Network Editor is the tool used to create or edit network Views. To create a new view, open network editor via the View Explorer: On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Managed Objects ► View Explorer. In View Explorer right click on the background and select New Folder or new view. The views have to be created into folders. To Edit a View, select the corresponding view in the View Explorer Tool, open the view and switch the mode to "Edit Mode". All the tasks in the following sections apply for both creating new views and editing existing views. Adding Objects and Moving objects in the view The figure illustrates the adding of objects and moving objects in the view.
Figure 117: Adding Objects and Moving objects in the view Adding an object You can add an object to a view in the following ways: 1. Drag an object from another tool and drop it at the desired position. 2. Paste the objects from the clipboard. When pasting from the clipboard, objects are placed in the center of the view. Cutting, copying and pasting objects In the Edit mode, cutting, copying, and pasting can be used to copy objects into the view. The following two rules must be taken into consideration: •
Objects copied from another tool are added as view symbols to the centre of the view.
•
Objects and background graphics copied from another Network View tool preserve their view-specific information. This means that the relative positions of the objects, links, the icon used to visualize the object, and other properties are copied as well.
The following describes the steps for cutting, copying and pasting objects.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
209
210
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
1. To cut or copy in the view, select the object to cut or copy, and paste into the clipboard. 2. To open the shortcut menu, right-click the selected element. Select Cut, Copy or Paste. Cut and Copy are enabled only if objects in the view are selected, while Paste is available only if the system clipboard contains data that can be pasted into the view. Cut, Copy and Paste can be performed using keyboard shortcuts shown in the menu, directly from the Edit menu, or using the associated toolbar buttons. Moving objects 1. Select an object to move. 2. You can move view objects as well as background graphics. 3. Click the selected object and move it around keeping the mouse button pressed down.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Adding a link between two objects Context You can add link only between two symbols by the following steps:
Figure 118: Procedure: Adding a link between two objects Procedure 1
In the lower toolbar, activate the Make Link tool.
2
Drag the link, from the first symbol to the second symbol by pressing the left mouse button.
3
Release the mouse button on the second symbol, when you see that the symbol is selected.
4
To cancel the link creation, release the mouse button on the view background. Result of this step Links are automatically laid out.
5
Right-click the link for changing the link type.
6
In the Change Link Type... submenu, select the link type.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
211
212
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Linking and unlinking a sub-view The following figure illustrates adding links and subviews.
Figure 119: Adding Links and Subviews Sub-view links can be attached to view objects. This allows the construction of a view hierarchy from high level to detailed views. 1. Right-click the view object and select Sub-view. 2. In the Select Sub-view dialog, browse to the view you want to link and select it in the open view. 3. To create a link, click Select. To stop the operation, click Cancel. 4. To unlink, select the view object that has a sub-view, and select the Remove sub-view option from the shortcut menu. Navigation Links A Navigation Link is used to create a link to navigate between any two views. The alarm state of an underlying view, associated with a Navigation Link, is not propagated to the views at the upper level. •
Creating Navigation Links Open the view in Edit mode. In the lower toolbar, click Add Navigation Link, and place in the desired position in the view.
•
Associating views to Navigation Links To navigate to a view, associate it to a Navigation Link in the Network View pane.
Adding new symbols, background graphics and background images The following figure illustrates the adding of new symbols, background graphics and background images.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Figure 120: Adding new symbols, background graphics and background images Adding background graphics To activate the graphic tool for adding the graphic object, press its button in the lower toolbar: Create the graphic object. Depending on the tool, follow the instructions below: •
To create a line define the endpoints with two mouse clicks. When two objects are connected with a line, the line end is not connected to the objects. This is clearly visible when you zoom in. Or
•
To create a rectangle drag the rectangle open while holding down the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to insert the rectangle. Or
•
To create an ellipsis drag the definition rectangle open while holding down the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to insert the ellipsis. Or
•
To create a polygon set the definition points by clicking in the view. End with a double-click. Or
•
To create a polyline set the definition points by clicking in the view. End with a double-click. Or
•
To create a label Click in the view to open a text edit box. Enter the label text and move the label to the required position. You can edit the label later by activating the Label tool and clicking on the label. Alternatively, when the select tool is active, you can use Ctrl + click on a background label, to edit it.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
213
214
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Adding background image to network view Background images can be added to a network view using the Select Background Image button available in the lower toolbar of the view. The following image formats are supported: •
jpg
•
png
•
gif
1. To add background image, switch to Edit mode. 2. In the lower toolbar, click the Select Background Image button. The Select Background Image window opens. 3. In the Select Background Image window, select the desired background image from the local file system. 4. You can preview the selected image on the right side of the Select Background Image window. 5. Click Open. By default the background image is set as the lowest layer of the network view. New or existing decorations are always placed on top of background image. The order of the background image can be changed like any other decorations. For information on how to change the order, see Stacking the background objects in Monitor Online Help. When a background image is added to the network view, its actual size is detained. However, on re-opening the view, the zoom factor of the background image and other contents of the view is adjusted so that all the contents fit in the view. 6. Save the view. The background image can be resized and moved around the view. To remove the background image, right-click the background image and select Remove. Each background image requires the following amount of memory: Width * Height * 4 bytes where, width and height are the dimensions of the image. Accordingly, the number of views, with background images, that can be simultaneously opened is subject to the client heap memory available. Rotate background graphics as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Select an object for rotating. Handles around the object appear. Select the Rotate tool. Click one of the handles and hold the mouse button down while turning around the object with the mouse.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Saving a view Open the shortcut menu of the tool, select Save to save the view, or Save As to save a copy of the view with a different name. You can also save the views in following ways: •
In the shortcut menu, use the displayed shortcut keys.
•
From the file menu, choose Save or Save As.
•
In the toolbar, click the associated Save button.
Figure 121: Saving a view
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
215
216
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Creating Children Objects’ Subviews You can create subviews automatically for all managed objects that have child objects. There are two options for creating subviews. For a selected managed object: •
One Level can be used to create subview for its immediate children.
•
All Levels can be used to create subview for its children at all levels.
Ensure that the adaptations are deployed for the selected managed objects and its children before creating subviews.
Figure 122: Creating Child Object Subviews 1/2
Figure 123: Creating Child Object Subviews 2/2
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Automatic View Generation Automatic view generation is possible via the option “Create Subviews”. This enables the creation of the full hierarchy of views and subviews (up to the last child object level) for any given parent object. With this feature, it is possible to create the subviews and simultaneously link the child view to the parent object automatically. This is possible only in the Edit mode of the Network View.
Figure 124: Automatic View Generation
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
217
218
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Working Set Manager
Figure 125: Working Set Manager A working set is a collection of managed objects. Working Set Manager enables you to create, view, browse, combine, export and remove working sets. You can create working sets based on preferred criteria: •
DN list
•
Area
•
FM Query
•
CM Query
•
CM Advanced Query
Additionally, you can create a new working set based on existing working sets in the Combine tab. Working sets can be managed by the Working Set Manager application or Command Line Interface (CLI). There are two kinds of working sets: •
Static working sets - where the list of managed objects is invariable.
•
Dynamic working sets - based on constant criteria, but the managed objects are added to or removed from a working set based on network changes.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
The maximum number of managed objects in each working set is 100 000. There are three working set types: •
DN List - a type of working set that consist of a static list of managed object DNs.
•
Area, CM Query, FM Query, CM Advanced Query, Combined - types of working sets dynamically changing content, based on the selected criteria.
•
Legacy - a working set type that was not migrated to the new data representation, or its migration script was not executed correctly. This working set cannot be edited.
The following figure illustrates the creation of working set based on FM query.
Figure 126: Creating Working Set - FM Query The following figure illustrates the creation of working set based on on CM Advanced Query.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
219
220
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 127: Creating Working Set - CM Advanced Query The following figure illustrates the combination of working sets.
Figure 128: Combining Working Sets
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Creating managed objects You can create new objects in the Managed Object Framework (MOF) database with the Object wizard. You can edit the optional attributes of the managed objects by using the Properties tool. Managed objects can define any manageable network resources present in a communication network. A managed object represents a physical or logical network element or a piece of equipment that belongs to the network. Managed objects are often hierarchical, with certain objects controlling and containing others. The Object wizard consists of two screens. The first screen provides all the available object classes and their releases, and the next screen populates all the mandatory attributes defined for the selected class. With the Object wizard you can perform the following tasks: •
Create root managed objects
•
Create child managed objects
You can open the New Object wizard in three ways: •
Right-click an object, and select New ► Object from the shortcut menu. Or
•
Right-click on the background of the Object Explorer window, and select New ► Object from the shortcut menu. Or
•
From the File menu, select New ► Object.
The New ► Object option is available in the shortcut menu and on the File menu only if CM_ManagedObject_Create permission is within the scope of the selected object. For more information on the scope, see Scope based authorization for managed objects in the online help. Creating managed object procedure The figure illustrates the creating of new managed objects.
Figure 129: Creating New Managed Objects
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
221
222
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
This section describes the procedure for creating a managed object. 1. On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Managed Objects ► Object Explorer. The Object Explorer window opens. Managed objects, from the MOF database are loaded in the Objects pane. 2. In the File menu, select New ► Object. Alternatively, right-click in the background of the Objects pane and select New ► Object. The New Object wizard for root managed object creation opens. 3. In the Object Class drop-down list, select an object class. At this stage, you can switch to create a child managed object for an existing parent managed object by clicking the Browse button. The Object Class drop-down list displays Presentation Name and Object Class ID inside the parenthesis. The Root Object check box is already selected and disabled for the root object creation. 4. Click Next. The Fill Attribute Values screen appears. 5. In the text field, enter the attribute values for the corresponding attributes of the managed object (for example, Instance) and click Finish. If the length of the text field is insufficient to display the complete information, click on the extreme right. This opens a new window where you can enter, edit, and view the complete information regarding the attribute values. The new root managed object is created.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Associating a Managed Object to Maintenance Region Context You can associate a managed object to Maintenance Region using the Maintenance Region option. You cannot associate a Maintenance Region to another Maintenance Region. This section describes steps for associating a managed object to maintenance region.
Prerequisites You must have CM_ManagedObject_MR_Association permission. Procedure 1
Right-click a Managed Object and select Maintenance Region Association. Result of this step The Associate Maintenance Region dialog appears.
2
Select the Maintenance Region to which you want to associate. Information To deselect the Maintenance Region, select No Maintenance Region Selected check-box.
3
To propagate the selected Maintenance Region to the sub tree, select Propagate Maintenance Region to the sub tree check-box.
4
Click OK.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
223
224
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Associating a Managed Object to Site Context The following figure illustrates the associating Managed Objects to MRs or sites.
Figure 130: Associating Managed Objects to MRs or Sites You can associate a managed object to Site using the Site Association option. You cannot associate a Site to another Site.
Figure 131: Editing object attributes in the Properties tool Prerequisites You must have CM_ManagedObject_Site_Association permission.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Procedure 1
Right-click a Managed Object and select Site Association. Result of this step The Associate Site dialog appears.
2
Select the Site to which you want to associate. Information To deselect the Site, select No Site Selected check-box.
3
To propagate the selected Site to the sub tree, select Propagate Site to the sub tree check-box.
4
Click OK.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
225
226
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Editing object attributes in the Properties tool Context The following figure illustrates editing managed objects properties.
Figure 132: Editing Managed Objects Properties After creating managed objects, you can set the values for non-mandatory object attributes in the properties tool. This section describes the steps for editing object attributes in the properties tool.
Figure 133: Procedure: Editing object attributes in the Properties tool Prerequisites You need to have CM_ManagedObject_Edit permission.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Procedure 1
Select Tools ► Properties. Information Alternatively, on the keyboard, press the Ctrl + 1 keys.
2
To edit, select the attribute value.
3
Enter the new value.
4
To open the external editor, press the Custom editor button for editing attributes with complex data types.
5
To accept the new value, Press Enter. Information Alternatively, in the external editor, click OK.
6
Save the modified object attributes using one of the following methods: a) In the Properties editor, click Save. b) Alternatively, from the File menu, select Save or Save All. Information When several objects are selected, the updated values are saved in all the objects. You can edit the properties of a managed object only if the CM_ManagedObject_Edit permission is within the scope of the selected object. Only power group users or users with global scope (that is if all maintenance regions and associated network elements are within the scope) can assign or remove relationship of an object to a maintenance region. The current state of the managed object in the managed system is defined using the attribute Object State. The manages objects are mainly in three stages: Operational, Non Operational and Created From Network. For more information on the scope, Scope based authorization for managed objects in online documentation.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
227
228
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Object Deletion You can delete one or more managed objects and their child managed objects only if you are authorized to delete them. You require the permission CM_ManagedObject_Delete to delete managed objects. The Managed objects are in three states which are as follows: •
Operational
•
Non Operational
•
Created From Network
While deleting managed objects, the managed objects in Created From Network state holds the same conditions as in Non operational state. The state of a managed object is set using the Properties tool. Deletion of objects in the Operational state can lead to loss of network information. When you delete an object, all its child objects are also deleted. Deleting managed objects in the non-operational state You can delete managed objects using the desktop tools like Object Explorer and Object List. The following procedure explains how to delete managed object using Object Explorer tool. 1. On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Managed Objects ► Object Explorer. The object pane lists the managed objects from the MOF database. 2. Select one or more managed objects to be deleted. 3. On the Desktop menu bar, select Edit ► Delete. a. Right-click the Managed Objects and select Delete from the context menu. b. Alternatively, From the Tool bar, click the Delete icon. c. Alternatively, Press Delete on the keyboard. The Confirm Object Deletion dialog displays. 4. Click Yes. The managed objects are deleted.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Deleting managed objects in the operational state Context The figure illustrates the deleting objects.
Figure 134: Deleting Objects You can delete managed objects using the desktop tools like Object Explorer and Object List.
Figure 135: Procedure: Deleting managed objects in the operational state Prerequisites You require the permission CM_ManagedObject_Delete to delete managed objects. Procedure 1
On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Managed Objects ► Object Explorer. Result of this step The object pane lists the managed objects from the MOF database.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
229
230
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
Select the managed objects.
3
On the Desktop menu bar, select Edit ► Delete.
a) Right click the managed objects and select Delete from the context menu. b) Alternatively, from the Tool bar, click the Delete icon. c) Alternatively, Press Delete on the keyboard. Result of this step The Confirm Object Deletion dialog displays. 4
Select the Delete authorized and operational objects option.
5
Click Yes to delete the managed objects. Information In the Confirm Object Deletion dialog box, click Details to view information about the Unauthorized objects and Operational objects.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Handling of Alarm Processing Fault Management Pipe Status The Fault Management (FM) Pipe represents alarm collection and correlation in FM platform. The FM Pipe collects, processes and stores alarms. It also supports synchronization of alarms between the network and the FM database. The figure illustrates the File Management pipe status.
Figure 136: File Management Pipe Status Displaying the status of the Alarm pipe The user can verify the status of: •
All pipes in Alarm Monitor
•
Pipe instance(s) in Alarm Monitor
•
The connection between Alarm Monitor and OSS5.x
On the Desktop menu bar, select Tools ► Monitoring Desktop ► FM Pipe Status. is displayed on the status bar. The color of the icon determines the status of the alarm pipe. •
•
If the color is green: •
All pipes in Alarm Monitor and OSS5.x are up
•
Pipe instance(s) in Alarm Monitor is/are up
•
The connection between Alarm Monitor and OSS5.x is up
If the color is red: •
One of the alarm pipe in Alarm Monitor or OSS5.x is down
•
Pipe instance(s) in Alarm Monitor is/are down
•
Connection error between Alarm Monitor and OSS5.x
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
231
232
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
•
When the processing threshold is exceeded, the FM pipe becomes slow. As a result, the alarm status is red. Alarm pipe processing threshold exceeded error is shown whenever the heartbeat (alarm number is -1) is not processed within a specified time period (default value is 60 seconds and is configurable).
•
The connection to FM services may fail indicating a problem with network or database.
•
When OSS5.x pipe error is occurred, a problem alarm is sent and visible in Alarm List.
By default, status of FM pipe is visible in the status bar whenever you open Desktop. When there is a pipe/connection error, an error message is displayed containing the details of pipe/connections that are down. By double- click the alarm pipe icon, it shows the actual latency in alarm pipes.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Manual upload of Alarms Due to various reasons such as network connection failure, the alarms raised from the network element may not reach the management system and therefore, are not available in the database. The FM platform recognizes the uploadable and non-uploadable alarms received from the different Network Elements. Alarm upload process synchronizes these alarms with the network management system database. The non-uploadable alarms do not get cancelled and remain active during alarm synchronization process. •
Uploadable Alarms: The alarms from the Network Element will be uploaded to management system database during synchronization.
•
Non-uploadable Alarms: The alarms from the Network Element will not be uploaded to management system database during alarm synchronization. These alarms might not state the actual status of the problem in Network Element and hence, need to be left active unless they are manually canceled.
The user can initiate an alarm upload process in Alarm Tools (Alarm List, Alarm History, Warning List) or Object Explorer. •
Alarm Tools (Alarm List, Alarm History, Warning List) •
Right-click an alarm and select Alarming Object ► Alarm Upload. Or
• •
Right-click an alarm and select Controlling Object ► Alarm Upload.
Object Explorer •
Right-click a Managed Object and select Alarm Upload. The Alarm Upload option is enabled only for Network Elements.
Result: The non-uploadable alarms available in management system remains active. Press Shift or Ctrl key to select the multiple managed objects for alarm uploading.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
233
234
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 137: Alarm Database Upload
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Deleting Alarms of an Object It is possible to delete all the alarms of a managed object. This helps in clearing the alarms for troubleshooting purposes. This process can be performed using the Alarm Tools (Alarm List, Alarm History, Warning List) or Object Explorer. •
Alarm Tools (Alarm List, Alarm History, Warning List) •
Right-click a managed object and select Delete All Alarms from Database ► Delete Alarms For Object. Or
•
•
Right-click an alarm and select Controlling Object ► Delete All Alarms from Database ► Delete Alarms For Object.
Object Explorer •
Right-click a managed object and select Delete All Alarms from Database ► Delete Alarms For Object.
All the alarms of a managed object are deleted from the database. The Delete All Alarms option is enabled in the context menu of the managed object only when the corresponding object class in adaptation includes Alarm States attribute group.
Figure 138: Deleting all Alarms from an MO
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
235
236
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: Enabling the FM Pipe Status Context This section tests the skills on the enabling of the FM pipe status.
Procedure 1
Navigate to Monitor application.
2
Click Tool ► Monitoring Desktop.
3
Select FM Pipe Status.
Post-requisites What should you do if the FM Pipe is not running? Did anything happen? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct
Summary: Advanced Fault Management with NetAct Module Summary This module covered the following learning objectives: •
Manage the alarm processing using alarm filtering and alarm reduction in NetAct.
•
Manage the NetAct Topology.
•
Revise the status of the alarms processing in NetAct.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
237
238
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Basic Performance Management with NetAct Module Objectives • Explain the purpose of Performance Management and describe what is a KPI. • Explain the Performance Manager tools. • Create, customize and generate performance management reports and dashboards.
Performance Management Principles Counters, Measurements and Observations The counter, measurement and observation are discussed in detailed as follows: •
Counter A counter is a register which is updated in the NE each time an event occurs. There are different types of counters based on how they can be updated. Cumulative counters represent a running count of, for example, how many times an event occurred while gauge counters take the value of what they measure, for example how many data packets are in a buffer. When a measurement interval ends, the values of the measurement counters are transferred to the OSS and the counters are reset for the next period. A counter provides the result in specified units, for example, in integers or Erlangs. The term counter is used as a synonym of Performance Indicator.
•
Measurement A measurement is an action where the system collects information about, for example, traffic and network events and then processes this information. A measurement is a fixed set of counters.
•
Observation An observation is a function where the system either collects information about certain events or directly produces information about single events in the system. It is possible to set certain objects under observation and to set conditions which must be fulfilled before the system produces reports or alarms. Observations are typically used to locate the part of the network system causing problems.
A measurement is in fact a collection of statistics, or to be more precise, a collection of counters. All of these counters are counting a particular event that relates to the measurement name. The measurements are grouped in this manner to allow better functionality and handling. This provides the user with easier selection of certain measurements necessary at a particular time. All measurements are independent of each other but the same user interface is used for handling all measurements. Each network element can have only one instance of each measurement running. In other words, the measurement is either active or not. Each measurement has a reporting period, therefore at set intervals, each counter will return with a value for each object. The output interval determines for how long counters are collected into a measurement. Measurements can be collected at regular intervals: 15 - 30 - 60 minutes, 2 - 3 - 4 - 6 - 12 - 24 hours.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
239
240
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 139: Traffic Measurements and Counters
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Logical Counters and KPIs A Logical Counter is a formula which combines, with arithmetical operations, data collected from measurement counters. Logical Counters that describe the most important aspects of the network operations are referred to as Key Performance Indicators (KPIs). A KPI can also include counters from different measurements. The measurements/counters must, however, all be of the same object level for you to be able to include them in one KPI. The operators decide individually what the KPIs are when they define the contents of the reports.
Figure 140: Logical Counters and KPIs
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
241
242
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Key Performance Indicators and Reports Network performance can be evaluated based on KPI. The users finally decide what key performance indicators are used when they define the contents of the reports. Key performance indicators use the counters received from one or various measurements. To create formulas, all the measurements used in the formula must be activated, and in addition, the measurements have to have the same output intervals. In case the measurements have different intervals, the measurements can be examined only according to the longer intervals. For example: Data is received from two NEs. The interval for one NE is set to be 15 minutes and the interval for the other NE is one hour. The KPI values can then be examined only with the minimum time period of one hour.
Figure 141: KPIs and Reports
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Knowledge Check: Performance Management Concepts •
What groups inside an organization can benefit from the PM data and why?
________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ •
Explain what is KPI?
________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
243
244
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
NetAct Performance Manager tools Performance Management system Performance Manager acts as the centralized data warehousing solution where applications can find a holistic and vendor agnostic view of the network’s performance and where reports can be defined on the fly using advanced tool sets. Performance Manager is delivered with a set of comprehensive pre-defined reports and Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) that meet the most common customer needs and allow immediate use of product. Data is collected from multiple systems and placed in one centralized data warehouse. The received data is then transformed to the NetAct Base native PM data format. Required conversion configurations or scripts are part of the respective adaptation. Once measurements are inserted into the NetAct Base database the respective data is available for further reporting and usage. The following figure illustrates the PM data flow:
Figure 142: PM data flow
Part of NE Integration: The network element has to be configured to send measurement data by using the NetAct application Administration of Measurements.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Performance Manager tools
Figure 143: Performance Manager start page A menu bar is located at the top of the main window and provides access to system wide functionalities or tools. These are as follows: •
Navigate ► Reporting Suite: This view displays the default content delivered by Nokia. Only administrators can customize this content, create and publish shared reports in the tree for all users. The customization is performed via Reporting Suite Publisher.
•
Navigate ► Saved reports: Allows browsing the reports and dashboards created by the users and stored in the system for future visualization and execution.
•
Reporting Tools ► Report Creator: Is used to create reports in a faster and easier way through a Graphical User Interface (GUI) wizard that guides you through all the required steps.
•
Reporting Tools ► KPI Creator: Allows you to create and change KPI formulas.
•
Administration ► Publisher: Allows you to publish your reports in the Reporting Suites tree.
•
Administration ► Scheduler: Allows the user to define a timetable to run a specific report.
•
Administration ► Reporter Admin Toolkit: Administration of multiple servers can be very complex, since there are many configuration files that need to be synchronized. With this application, administrators can easily configure PM pipe settings in a graphical user interface.
•
Administration ► Thresholder and Profiler: You can define thresholds and rules on performance counters or KPIs.
•
Preferences: Users can define their own preferences regarding the application look and feel and behavior
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
245
246
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
The Home area is the default view presented after a successful login. The menus are available on top. When the user starts navigating, the areas are kept in tabs at the bottom in the View Bar and the user can always access the opened areas with all the settings previously defined. The arrow on the left side of the View Bar allows toggling it.
Figure 144: Performance Manager GUI
The navigation tree on selected pages provides, for example, choices of object to select when the task is to view, edit and/or save.
Figure 145: Performance Manager tools
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Performance Manager start page To be able to prevent problems in the network before they occur, it is important to have a good understanding of the data as well as powerful tools to sort out the most important indicators. With Performance Manager, operators can view and analyze the network performance data coming from different sources. Raw data becomes meaningful information that is aggregated and visualized in graphical and textual reports. KPIs are the most important indicators of the network’s performance. KPI reports allow the operator to detect the first signs of performance degradation, prevent the development of critical network problems, troubleshoot specific elements and analyze performance trends. Performance Manager provides a wide range of functionalities and reporting tools that are targeted for all user groups of a performance management system. These functionalities and tools are described in the following sections. Performance Manager Functions The Performance Manager enables the user to: The easy-to-use GUI allows executing general web configuration, advanced reporting, threshold supervision, profiling and trending on long term raw and aggregated data. With the web portal functions, the users are able to: •
Configure web page user preferences.
•
Create and edit reports, for private or public usage with Report Creator.
•
Create and edit KPIs, for private or public usage with KPI Creator.
•
Browse for existing KPIs and reports.
•
Customize dashboards with tables and multiple chart types.
•
Schedule reports and distribute them via email in CSV or XLS format.
•
Customize the web portal look and feel and setup user's preferences.
Reporting functions The following specific reporting functionalities are available in Performance Manager portal: •
Table and chart report views
•
Export to Excel (table and chart views) and CSV (table view only)
•
Saved Reports and Report Navigator (act as bookmarks in the reports tree)
•
Report documentation (including KPI formulas)
•
Report scheduling
•
Data Reliability
•
Table filtering
•
Advanced filtering
•
KPI thresholding within reports
•
Drills
•
Time overlay
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
247
248
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
•
Top N analysis
•
Multi-technology & multi-vendor reports
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Performance Manager tools Context This section tests the students to explain the purpose of the Performance Manager tool.
Procedure 1
Login to NetAct and at start page.
2
Navigate to Performance Manager application. Result of this step What is the general purpose of the Performance Manager? Write down the functional tabs you can see at the top level. The Navigation menu, provides users with access to already created reports. What is the difference between the Reporting Suite View and the Saved Reports View in the Navigation menu? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
249
250
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Knowledge Check: Performance Manager applications •
Describe in general terms, how PM data is collected and processed in NetAct and how data is available to be used by the reporting applications.
________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ •
How Network Elements’ traffic measurements are administrated?
________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Create, customize and generate performance management reports and dashboards Creating reports Context The Report Creator is used to create reports in a faster and easier way through a GUI wizard that guides you through all the required steps with a minimal number of clicks and user decisions. The functions and services available in the report creator tool:
Figure 146: Creating reports
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
251
252
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Procedure 1
Select the technology, network object or hierarchy of network objects for which the report shall be produced.
Information After selecting Reporting Tools ► Report Creator you have to select in the following order: Technology, Hierarchy, Report Level and Object. Use * wildcard to match any character. There is no limitation on the number of wildcards used. Select multiple objects using the Shift (to select several consecutive objects) or Ctrl (to select several non consecutive objects) keys. You can only select a maximum of 20 objects. a) Select Edit Configuration Management Selection. Information This optional tab is only available for 3GRAN and LTE radio and allows to select configuration parameters for the selected object. b) Select the time period in which the report runs by clicking on the Edit Time Selection button. Result of this step A new window opens to define the time period.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
2
Select the time level that shall be used in the report.
Information Time Level
The Time Selection panel allows you to select the time granularity for the report.
Time Type has three options: Relative
The time period queried is the time period of the server time zone.
Absolute
The time period queried is the local user time zone. If the server is in a different time zone you may find useful to adjust the local user time.
Real Time
You can define the time period in minutes (Look back period) from current time that monitors in a Real time report. If, for example, you define the Look back period to 50 minutes, the report shows historical data from 50 minutes back to the current time and adds new data until the maximum default of 120 minutes time interval window. After this, older data is removed from the report, always keeping the 120 minutes maximum window. Selected Time Level must be RAW.
After defining the time Level/Time Type you have to select the counter for the report (KPI/Counter Selection or Edit KPI Selection).
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
253
254
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
3
Select the KPIs, KPI groups, counters and previously defined reports to be used or included in the new report that is being created.
Information When selecting a KPI, a counter or a report, the info box below the list of items displays specific information on the selected item (for example, name, description, formula of the selected KPI). In the KPIs pane, you can add to the report the available KPIs, which are listed alphabetically. In the Counters pane, you can add the available counters. In the Reports pane, you can add KPIs from predefined reports. The reports are grouped into different purposes and available in the drop-down list. When you select the report group, the KPI list is populated accordingly. 4
Preview and save the report.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Saving and generating reports
Figure 147: Preview Reports window The next step allows you to preview the report. In this step you can: •
Name the report.
•
Provide a textual description of the report.
•
Configure the report as private (access limited to the creator and administrator) or shared (other users allowed to access it).
•
Save the report.
•
See how the display of the report looks like. You can also experiment changing the visualization options of the data (for example, change from table view to chart).
•
Trigger the report execution (generate).
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
255
256
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 148: Save Report Window
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Create report for active user equipment with category 5 for MRBTS Context Execute the following steps for creating report for active user equipment with category 5 for MRBTS:
Procedure 1
Select Reporting Tools ► Report Creator.
2
Select LNBTS-NSN LTE Base Transceiver Station under the NSN Adaptation Support folder in the Technology pane.
3
Select PLMN/MRBTS in the Hierarchy Panel.
4
Select MRBTS in the Object Level Pane.
5
Select the available NE which appears in the Object Filtering Pane.
6
Click on Edit Configuration Management Selection.
7
Skip the CM Parameter Set Selection and click on Edit Time Selection.
8
Select HOUR in the Time Level Pane.
9
In the Time Type Pane select: Relative, 1 day and Last Midnight.
10 Click KPI/Counter Selection. 11 Click Counters ► LTE Cell Load of the filter. 12 Choose the counter ACTIVE_UE_CAT_5_AVG and move the counter into the Selected KPIs/Counters plane by clicking the button. 13 Click Preview Report.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
257
258
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
14 Enter a name for the report and click Generate & Save. 15 Save it under MyReports. Information If needed generate a new folder with this name. Result of this step The following screenshot is the result of the data table:
16 Change the output type by clicking on the gear Output type ► Line Chart.
and choose
Result of this step
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Creating Dashboards Context This functionality gives you the ability to add arbitrary and independent report panels into the same dashboard view. It acts as a blank canvas for grouping various reporting panels within the application. You can easily create new dashboards or add panels to existing ones. That can be easily done by selecting the corresponding option in a panel belonging to a generated report.
Figure 149: Add to Dashboard
Not for Real Time. Procedure 1
Generate a Report.
2
Add Panel to new, existing or active Dashboard.
3
Click Save.
4
Save and name it.
Example The following screenshot shows three panels in a single dashboard:
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
259
260
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 150: Display reports in Dashboards - Three Panels in Dashboard
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Viewing and customizing reports Context Execute the following steps to view and customize reports:
Procedure 1
Select Navigate ► Saved Reports and click on selected Report.
Result of this step The following screenshot shows the report result in form of a data table:
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
261
262
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
Customize Reports. Information The following screenshot depicts the Output Type available:
The following screenshot shows an alternate viewing option:
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Report Navigator The Report Navigator allows you to display, search and access all user specific and shared reports stored in the system. The Report Navigator is accessible via the Explore option within the list of saved reports. Select Navigate ► Saved Reports ► Explore and select Report to customize.
Figure 151: Report Navigator The Report Navigator allows you to: •
Search reports based on user specified criteria
•
Trigger reports execution
•
Schedule reports
•
Edit report details and parameters
•
Share the report with other users
•
Save the report with a different name (for example, for customization purposes)
•
Delete reports
•
Export reports
Figure 152: Report Navigator - Customize report
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
263
264
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Report Suite Publisher
Figure 153: Report Suite Publisher - Publish report The Report Publisher tool allows you to publish your reports in an own folder in the Reporting Suites tree if you had shared your report before. It comprises a very convenient filtering panel, which helps you to quickly locate the report to be shared. Select Administration ► Publishers ► Reporting Suite Publisher.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct
Lab exercise: Report Creator Context Perform the following steps create a report for a specific counter:
Procedure 1
Open Report Creator and filter for an MRBTS.
2
Create and generate a hourly report for the Active TTI based on the two counters for the last three days back from last midnight.
3
Search for the counters ACTIVE_TTI_DL (M8012C90) and ACTIVE_TTI_UL (M8012C89).
4
Change the Output Type of the report to Line Chart.
5
Share the report for other users.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
265
266
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Summary: Basic Performance Management with NetAct Module Summary This module covered the following learning objectives: •
Explain the purpose of Performance Management and describe what is KPI.
•
Explain the Performance Manager tools.
•
Create, customize and generate performance management reports and dashboards.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
Advanced Performance Management Module Objectives • • • •
Create, modify and publish KPIs. Manage preferences and schedule reporting. Set threshold values for alarms. Create and activate measurement plans.
Create, modify and publish KPIs KPI Creator introduction The KPI Creator tool allows you to create and change KPI formulas and has the following features: •
Technology-based KPI creation
•
Create/Edit Custom KPIs from existing KPIs/Counters
•
Source KPI/Counter Search and Filter options
•
ORACLE® functions support
•
Automatic Divide-By-Zero checks
•
Custom KPIs available for use in Reports
•
Delete Custom KPIs
•
KPI Title and Unit specifications for the Report Output
•
KPI Formula validation
Select Reporting Tools ► KPI Creator The following figure illustrates the steps to create KPIs:
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
267
268
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 154: Create KPIs
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
Creating a KPI Context Perform the following steps for creating a KPI:
Figure 155: Procedure: Creating a KPI Procedure 1
Select the KPI technology from the drop-down list. If the KPI list is not automatically updated, click the Refresh button.
Information In the KPI Selection tab, the available KPIs are listed alphabetically, according to the technology selected. 2
Insert a name up to 30 characters. Information The Name is a mandatory field and must be unique.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
269
270
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
3
Insert a title and choose the unit. Information The Title is a mandatory field and is useful to identify the KPI column header. The Unit is also a mandatory field and all the available units for the custom KPI are provided in the drop-down list.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
4
Click the Formula Options tab and select the KPIs or Counters, or both.
a) Click the arrow button to insert the formula in the text box. Information The Formula is a mandatory field and is fully editable. To filter the KPI list type the KPI name in the text box. The filtering is dynamic according to the KPI name written. To use the KPIs formula in the custom KPI, select the desired KPI and click the button. The formula is copied to the Formula field in the KPI Editor area. If you want to reuse all KPI information select the desired KPI and click the New from Selected KPI button. All the KPI information is copied in KPI Editor area fields, but the word ‘New’ is added to the name and the title fields, since the system KPIs cannot be edited. By clicking the New button, all the fields in the KPI Editor area are deleted and it enables you to start editing a new KPI. You can delete custom KPIs by selecting the KPI and clicking the Delete Custom KPI button.
If you click the New from Selected KPI button the information from that specific KPI is added to the KPI Editor area and all fields are editable. To filter the Counters list, type the counter name in the text box. The filtering is dynamic according to the counter name. To use the counter formula in the custom KPI, select the desired counter and click the
button.
The formula is copied to the Formula field in the KPI Editor area. Check the Use NVL flag if you want to use the counter formula with the NULL VALUE LOGIC function applied, which replaces a value when a null value is found.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
271
272
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
5
Insert the operators in the formula or select from the Functions tab.
Information The Functions tab allows you to use pre-defined functions in the custom KPI formula. In the Name selection box, select the desired function and click the button. The function is copied to the Formula field in the KPI Editor area. The Usage description box is available below the Name selection box and provides additional information on the selected function. The description box includes the syntax, expression, conditions, results and other information, depending on the selected function. The following operators are accepted:
6
•
Addition
•
Subtraction
•
Multiplication
•
Division
•
The parentheses are also valid and help the creation of more complex KPI formulas.
Enter a KPI description in the Description field. Information It is visible to all users. The Description is an optional field and is useful to describe in more detail the KPI usage and the KPI formula.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
7
The Permission is a non-editable field and informs if the editing KPI is private (not published) or public (published).
8
Click the Validate button to validate the formula syntax and all the mandatory KPI fields in the KPI Editor area. Information If some field is not valid, a pop-up window is displayed, informing which field is not valid. The KPI Publisher tool can be used to share the KPI with other users.
9
Click the Save button to save the KPI. Information A quick validation of the KPI fields is performed before saving the new KPI information.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
273
274
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Create KPIs The following shows a formula to calculate the ratio between the number of active users and the number of the RRC connected users in a cell: Unit is in %.
Figure 156: Formula for KPI creation The following screenshot is an example to create own KPI:
Figure 157: Creating KPIs using formula
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
KPI Publisher By default, it is not visible to anyone except the user who created the formula. The KPI Publisher tool described in the following chapter can be used to share the KPI with other users. Select Administration ► Publisher ► KPI Publisher.
Figure 158: KPI Publisher
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
275
276
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: Creating, modifying and publishing KPI Context Perform the following to create a KPI using the formula provided:
Prerequisites Check that the Radio NEs (MRBTS) are available. Procedure 1
Create a KPI using the following formula: Information Active user equipment with Category 5 + active user equipment with Category 8.
2
Validate and Save the KPI.
3
Open the existing KPI and modify KPI title using the formula description. Information Active user equipment with Category 5 + active user equipment with Category 6. Active user equipment with Category 7 + active user equipment with Category 8.
4
Validate and Save the KPI.
5
Publish the KPI.
Post-requisites ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
Manage preferences and schedule reporting Preferences The Nokia Performance Manager users can define their own preferences regarding the application's look and feel and behavior such as: •
Define the default view displayed when the user logs in the application.
•
Define the colors to be used in the report charts.
•
Filter out the colors that cannot be recognized by color-blind users.
•
Define the application theme, which determines, for example, the colors of the menu bars, fonts and backgrounds.
Figure 162: Preferences
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
277
278
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Report Scheduler This functionality shows all reports which were created with the option Schedule Report. After starting the Schedule Browser you get a timetable to modify scheduled reports is displayed. The list of scheduled reports is managed through the schedule browser window (administrator privileges required). All the reports scheduled through the report scheduler are listed within this window. The schedule browser works as cockpit or control center for the management of all scheduled reports. The administrator can: •
Access detailed information on the scheduled report (for example, report information, schedule details, current execution status).
•
Trigger the report execution according to the defined schedule.
•
Pause the report schedule execution .
•
Edit the schedule.
•
Delete the report schedule.
•
Filter the list of schedules (all, running, paused).
This level of control allows the administrator to check and approve the scheduling of each report execution making sure that the execution of the scheduled reports does not affect the daily operations of other users. Select Administration ► Scheduler.
Figure 163: Report Scheduler - Schedule Browser
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
Lab exercise: Scheduling a report Context Perform the following to schedule a report:
Prerequisites Check that the Radio MRBTS are available. Procedure 1
Choose a report for scheduling from the saved reports plane.
2
Explore the report.
Post-requisites ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
279
280
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Set threshold values for alarms Thresholder and Profiler You can define thresholds and rules on performance counters or KPIs. When a threshold has been crossed, an alarm notification is created and can be either forwarded through the Fault Management system or via SMS/e-mail. This allows for proactive performance monitoring where the operations department is actively alerted on potential network problems rather than having to manually analyze various different performance reports. Select Administration ► Thresholder and Profiler
Figure 167: Thresholder and Profiler - Define thresholds
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
Lab exercise: Object selection Context A minor alarm should be generated if the average number of active UEs with UE Category 5 (active_UE_CAT_5_AVG) falls below 10 within 1 hour. Perform the following steps to select an object:
Procedure 1
Click Administration ► Thresholder and Profiler.
2
Select LNBTS-NSN LTE Base Transceiver Station in the Technology Pane.
3
Select PLMN/MRBTS in the Hierarchy Panel.
4
Select MRBTS in the Report Level Pane.
5
Select the available NE which appears in the Objects Pane.
6
Click on Edit Time Selection.
Post-requisites ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
281
282
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: Time Selection Context Perform the following steps to select an object:
Evaluation period
Time interval in which report is re-executed to check for new values. It can also be seen as the period duration.
Evaluation delay
Delay between the period ends and the report is executed in order to fetch data that comes late. If the delay is set too low, there is no PM data in the database for the corresponding KPIs/PIs and that is why no threshold violations can occur.
Procedure 1
Select HOUR in the Time Level Pane.
2
In the Time Type Pane select: Evaluation Period and Evaluation delay.
3
Click Edit Alarm Settings.
Post-requisites ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
Lab exercise: Alarm Settings Context Perform the following steps to modify the Alarm Settings:
Figure 168: Threshold and Profiler - Alarm Settings Procedure 1
In the Counters pane browse for, LTE Cell Load and select ACTIVE_UE_CAT5_AVE.
2
In the Formula creation pane, click on Minor.
3
With the add button, the selected counter is shifted to the Minor field.
4
Create the formula <10.
5
Click Edit Threshold Information and Notification.
Post-requisites ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
283
284
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: Threshold information and notification Context Execute the following steps to set the Threshold information and Notification:
Supported alert methods are: •
Alarm forwarded to the fault management system.
•
E-mail notification sent to a configurable address.
•
SMS sent to a configurable telephone number.
Procedure 1
Define a name for this threshold.
2
Activate check box so that the threshold alarm appears in Alarm List.
3
Define a new Alarm id for this alarm.
4
Define Alarm text for this number.
5
Save it.
Post-requisites ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
Create and activate measurement plans Administration of Measurements Administration of Measurements (AoM) application enables you to manage (enable/disable) measurements on network elements to allow data collection from network elements to NetAct. This application can be used to view, create, modify and delete measurement plans and templates. Measurement plans can be used to start and stop the measurements on the network elements. AoM also helps to upload measurement plans from the network elements to NetAct.
Figure 169: AoM-Start window The tool contains four tabs. These tabs are as follows: Network Overview
It enables you to view the activation status of measurements in the network.
Plans
It enables you to create, modify, delete, activate and deactivate plans.
Templates
It enables you to create, modify and delete a template. It also allows you to create a plan based on an existing templates.
Operation Overview
It enables you to view a summary of all the operations carried out during a specific time period for specific NE types.
Before we prepare a plan for activation we have to find out the relevant counter for our measurement and the related measurement type. This can be done easily using Object Information Browser.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
285
286
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 170: Object Information Browser
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
Creating plan Context A plan enables you to select and schedule measurements and counters in a single network element. You can also create a plan based on an existing template by adding specific plan parameters such as network element instances and start or stop dates. This allows an administrator to define a template, for example, for each network element type. Other users can create plans for the specific network element instances using the existing template. Creating a plan is done in three steps. Procedure 1
Click on New in the Plans tab to open the configure schedule items.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
287
288
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
Configure schedule items. a) In the Name field, enter a name for the plan.
b) In the Description field, enter the description for the new plan. c) Select an Adaptation from the drop-down list (see in application Dynamic Adaption on NetAct startpage). An Adaptation provides the interface through which data originating from network elements enters NetAct and can be handled by NetAct applications.
d) Select a measurement type from the Measurement type checklist. e) Define schedules for the selected measurement type. f)
Click Add to List (List of available measurement types). A list can contain one or more measurement types and/or adaptions.
g) Press Next to continue with Step 3.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
3
Add managed objects.
a) Select the supported MO class means the specific product and the release. Information For example, MRBTS-FLF16. b) Select the Measurement type and the Managed object. Information For example, LTE Cell Load for MRBTS-38. c) Click Add to List (List of available managed objects). d) Click Save.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
289
290
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Activating plan Context The measurements in the uploaded plans are active in the corresponding network elements. Perform the following steps to open the Plan tab in Administration of Measurement application:
Procedure 1
Select the plan name by checking the selection box.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
2
Press Activate to confirm activation.
Information This process may take several minutes. Result of this step The Operation Overview screen opens and you can check the status of the activation. Result The measurements in the uploaded plans are active in the corresponding network elements.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
291
292
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: Creating new measurement plan for LTE cell load Context Perform the following to create a new plan:
Prerequisites Check that the Radio NEs (MRBTS) are available. Procedure 1
Create and activate a plan for LTE Cell Throughput.
2
Check the measurement details in the Object Information Browser.
Post-requisites ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Advanced Performance Management
Summary: Advanced Performance Management Module Summary This module covered the following learning objectives: •
Create, modify and publish KPIs.
•
Manage preferences and schedule reporting.
•
Set threshold values for alarms.
•
Create and activate measurement plans.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
293
294
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Configuration Management Module Objectives • Explain the purpose of Configuration Management. • List the NetAct Configurator applications and explain their purpose. • Use the Configurator tools for executing basic tasks for configuration management. • Explain the Radio Optimization Process in NetAct and the main functionalities of Optimizer.
Configuration Management in NetAct Overview NetAct Configurator is a component in the scalable NetAct framework for operating mobile networks. Configurator gives access to real-time network configuration data and provides tools to manage network configuration. The main functionalities of NetAct Configurator are: •
Storing the network parameters in the database
•
Data exchange with external tools
•
Setting, modifying, viewing and comparing network configuration data
•
Mass modification on the network: integrating sites, extending and optimizing the network
•
Tuning of the network configuration
The network architecture can be functionally grouped into the access network and the core network. The access network handles all radio-related functionality while the core network is responsible for routing calls and data connections to external networks. With NetAct Configurator, the access network and core network are managed in a centralized way.
Figure 171: Configuration Management Overview
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
295
296
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Configuration Management Process NetAct Configurator is a fully integrated application which provides common configuration management functionality for multi-technology networks. Single data storage, common applications and processes enable efficient and reliable management of complex networks comprising of different technologies. High operational efficiency is achieved through: •
Automated processes
•
Mass operations
•
High network quality through
•
Reducing human errors
•
Working on use case and data level
•
Several data auditing options
The following chart shows the basic process of Configuration Management in NetAct: 1. By uploading configuration, the operator gets the current active operative status of the network (network elements). This information will be the base for all configuration activities. 2. Configurator provides different tools for creating and checking the desired configurations on the network level, ranging from single parameter changes up to complete network configurations. 3. The provisioning activities are carried out by Configurator after operator confirmation on demand or scheduled, being able also to create also fallback configurations as a backup for the changes executed on the network.
Figure 172: Configuration Management Processes
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Configurator Basic Concepts The Configurator applications in NetAct use a group of basic concepts which describe the network and the actions that those tools execute on it. The Network resources are represented as managed objects in NetAct. Configurator supports managed object classes in the core network. The actual configuration refers to the current configuration of the managed network. There is only one actual configuration in the system. The changes to be executed on the actual configuration are implemented using plans. A plan contains a configuration change that will be performed or has been performed to the network. The reference configuration is a data set that describes the desired or the target configuration of the network for comparing it with the actual configuration due to consistency checks. When the network is expanded and optimized, templates offer ready-made parameter sets for defining new managed objects in the network. Templates allow using patterns in object creation and decrease manual typing. The consistency of the network parameters is vital for the optimum functioning of the network. Configurator provides rules and tools to check the consistency of the actual configuration or a single plan. Site template mechanism allows you to create a base station configuration model and use this configuration model when generating configuration data for a new base station. Site templates are applicable for GSM, WCDMA, LTE, and Single RAN managed objects. The benefit of the mechanism is that the user needs to define only a few mandatory parameters for a new base station, whereas the rest of the configuration is automatically generated by Configurator. The user can define the scope of managed objects and their parameters included in the site templates. Additionally, there are functionalities for import, export, create, modify and delete site templates. Site templates can be generated from the actual or planned configuration. The site template functionality is part of the autoconfiguration and autoconnection functionality.
Figure 173: Configuration Management Basic Concepts
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
297
298
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Managed Objects The commonly used definition of Managed Object is also applicable within the context of Configurator: A Managed Object is understood as an abstract representation of a network resource, where the resource can either be a physical entity or a logical entity. A Managed Object Class defines the information model of a network resource type (For example, BTS information model). Information model in this context includes: •
Overall information about the network resource (network resource type name, For example, “BTS”, network resource model release, For example, “Release 1" and so on.)
•
Parameter information about the network resource (parameter name, parameter description, parameter data type, parameter range, and so on.)
A Managed Object Instance represents a specific network resource (For example, BTS installed in site x in region y). The representation of the specific network resource means: Identification information about the specific network resource (For example, fully qualified distinguished name, supplementary identification parameters such as User Label, Cell ID and so on.) Parameter value data about the specific network resource.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Working sets Working sets allow NetAct users to group particular network elements according to their own criteria. One network element can be assigned to more than one working set. Working sets are available in CM Editor and CM Operations Manager after creating them with the Working Set Manager tool. For more information on working sets, see NetAct Administration ► NetAct Administration Helps ► Working Set Manager Help. For information on viewing and filtering working sets, see Viewing the list of working sets and managing working sets content and Selecting Working Set to be used as filter in CM Editor Help. The maximum number of managed objects in each working set is 100 000. If you add new elements in the working set after having set a scheduled upload, these new elements are not added in the scheduled upload scope.
Figure 174: Basic Concepts: Managed Objects
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
299
300
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Configuration Types
Figure 175: Configuration Types In the context of Configurator, the configuration is a set of Managed Objects. Configurator supports the following types of Configurations: Actual Configuration
Set of Managed Objects that represent the current configuration of the network (there is only one Actual Configuration stored/managed in the system).
Reference Configuration
Set of Managed Objects that represent the desired configuration of the network (there is only one Reference Configuration stored/managed in the system).
Plan Configuration
Set of Managed Objects that represent a configuration change that will be performed or has been performed to the network (there is no theoretical limit as to how many Plan Configurations are stored/managed in the system).
Planned Configuration
Set of Managed Objects that represent what would be the status of the network if a certain Plan Configuration would be implemented (Planned Configurations are not stored as such in the system, but instead they are calculated on real time).
Actual configuration The actual configuration comprises of the following: •
Managed objects, location in topology, and object identification in topology database.
•
Parameter values in Configurator database.
•
Parameters with interface from Configurator to network element.
•
Non-network parameters and non-network objects without a management interface from Configurator.
•
Object administrative state (locked, unlocked) in topology database.
•
Object state (operational, non-operational) in topology database.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Non-operational objects are stored in the topology and they are not part of the active network. The non-operational objects may have been planned for future use, or they have been deleted from network. Reference Configuration The reference configuration is stored in the system as a separate data set from actual and planned configurations. Reference configuration can describe the desired configuration that should be kept in the network, but it can also describe the target configuration of the network. For both cases it is possible to find out if there have been changes in the actual configuration in the network, and if the changes are valid and expected. Plans A plan is a configuration containing a set of modifications of the actual configuration. A plan contains only modifications and it can be viewed on top of the actual configuration. Plans can include the following types of modifications: •
Add new managed objects with mandatory parameters (create operation).
•
Remove an existing managed object (delete operation).
•
Modify parameters (including administrative state) of an existing managed object in a certain configuration (update operation). The distinguished name or version cannot be modified using a plan. Modifying parameters of some future version of managed object in target configuration is not possible.
Figure 176: Configuration Types and Network Plans The figure illustrates the comparison between actual configuration and planned configuration.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
301
302
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 177: Actual Configuration vs. Planned Configuration Configuration Templates In the context of Configurator, template is a set of default values that are applicable to a specific Managed Object Class. Templates are useful in several contexts: •
When parameters have the same values in different Managed Object Instances across the network In this case the activity of populating such parameter values is extremely simplified, as the only required activity is to fill a template and then apply the template to the needed Managed Object Instances.
•
When enforcement of a specific parameter policy is required In this case templates can be filled with the policy requirements, those templates then are audited against the Actual Configuration and deviations are reported.
There are two different types of Templates in Configurator: •
System Template Is a set of default values that represent the factory presets. There is one System Template per Managed Object Class and it is not user editable.
•
User Template Is a set of default values that represent default values applicable under user defined conditions, For example, there can be one user template that defines the default values applicable to a rural BTS, while there can be another user template that defines the default values applicable to an urban BTS. There is no theoretical limit to the number of User Templates stored/managed in the system.
Using templates A template is primarily used to define an initial parameter set for a new managed object by assigning a template to the object. The user can define assignments for each planned object manually. Assignment information can also be imported as part of the plan into NetAct Configurator. The assignment is shown as the name of the template in user interfaces. Values from the assigned template for new managed objects are automatically utilized by CM Applications the same way as they would have been defined directly in plan.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Figure 178: Templates
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
303
304
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Configuration Rules and Checks During network configuration planning and plan data building, many types of constraints and dependencies need to be noted and taken care of. The risk that a new, erroneous, or incomplete plan harms the network functioning after activation to network elements needs to be minimized. NetAct Configurator rules and check functionality by CM Analyzer can be used for that purpose. CM Analyzer contains predefined rule sets that can be used in different procedures with network configuration. Also new rules can be added and tailored into the system by the user. Rules can be collected into rule sets. The sets must contain an appropriate selection of rules that can be meaningfully executed at the same time. Rule or rule set execution is called a check in CM Analyzer. The target of the check can be an actual network configuration, reference configuration or a plan that is edited or built using, for example, CM Editor. Erroneous objects and violations are shown to the user in the user interface for corrective actions. In some cases, the correction or addition is straightforward, and CM Analyzer is able to add automatic corrections to the plan.
Figure 179: Rules and Checks
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
NetAct Configurator Applications Configurator Architecture The following figure illustrates the configuration architecture.
Figure 180: Configurator Architecture
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
305
306
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
CM Editor CM Editor provides intuitive parameter editing, both in minor parameter modifications and mass modification purposes. CM Editor functionality includes the following operations: •
Managing plans: Creating, modifying, and deleting plans
•
Creating, and mass creating of managed objects, editing, and mass editing parameter values of managed objects
•
Managing the actual configuration
•
Viewing actual network configuration
•
Send to network to make configuration changes on network elements without creating any plan in CM Editor
•
Managing administrative states of GSM, WCDMA, LTE and core network objects
•
Managing GSM routing areas: uploading and downloading Routing Area IP Addresses from/to DNS
•
Managing the reference configuration
•
Managing planned and actual configuration with Table Editor
•
Managing templates: Creating and deleting templates, Editing templates
•
Managing maintenance regions
•
Visualizations to indicate the status of the managed objects and parameters
•
Backward and forward arrows to navigate between different views chosen by the user
•
Remove objects from plans to undo any changes to them
Figure 181: CM Editor
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
CM Analyzer CM Analyzer is the tool for checking the consistency rules in the radio and core network parameters and managed objects. CM Analyzer functionality includes the following operations: •
Checking radio network and core network parameters and managed objects, and ensuring that the parameters are defined according to consistency rules.
•
Checking for discrepancies in actual configuration, planned configurations and in reference configuration.
•
Auto correction: defining a rule for automatic inconsistency correction.
Figure 182: CM Analyzer
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
307
308
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
CM Rule Editor CM Rule Editor is a web application in NetAct Configurator. It enables operations to create and delete user-defined rules in a simple way. Rules can be used in the CM Analyzer application to check the network consistency. You can choose a desirable template type and then follow the wizard. Custom rules and rule sets can be defined in xml files and stored in the following location: $ETCROOT/custom/conf/rac/rules. Make sure that you have access to the directory $ETCROOT/custom/conf/rac/rules. In the CM Analyzer user interface a custom rule looks as follows: and a custom rule set looks as follows: User..
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Selecting a template type Context In the CM Rule Editor start page you can select a preferred template. The rule deletion performance is decreased when a number of user-defined rules is greater than 1000. The steps to select a template is as follows:
Figure 183: Procedure: Selecting a template type Procedure 1
In a Search field, type a required phrase to narrow the list of the available templates and then click on the template name. Information Alternatively, from the templates list, select the desired template by clicking on the template's name. Result of this step The template description appears in the Rule template description field and the Next button is enabled.
2
Click the Next button, to move to the templates wizard.
Result You are redirected to the selected template.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
309
310
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Filling in the templates parameters To create a rule, you need to follow the wizard. Each template has different wizard steps to be performed. Fields marked with a red star are obligatory to fill in. You can use helper for the drop-down list fields. You can also narrow the scope of the drop-down list by entering some letters in the text field. In the case that the first object which you selected from the Managed object or Managed object class combobox belongs to an external RAT, the rest of the displayed objects belong to the chosen RAT.
Figure 184: CM Rule Editor
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
CM Operations Manager The overall function of the CM Operations Manager is to transfer configuration data between planning tools, NetAct Configurator, and the network. It provides both realtime feedback and history information on the operations. CM Operations Manager functionality includes the following operations: •
Provisioning plans to the network
•
Preparing, pre-activating, activating
•
Scheduling provisioning operations
•
Generating and activating backup plans
•
Uploading actual configuration
•
Scheduling upload operations
•
Exporting actual configuration and plans
•
Managing plans
•
Creating and deleting plans, Importing and exporting network plans, Comparing plans to actual configuration and reporting the differences, Validating plans against actual or reference configuration
•
Importing and exporting reference configuration
•
Managing templates: Deleting templates, Importing and exporting templates
•
Visualizing MML commands for R4 core network
•
Executing MML commands and MML command files for R4 core network and SGSN with built-in command manager tool.
Figure 185: CM Operations Manager
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
311
312
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
CM Reference The CM Reference application is used for managing the reference configuration. With CM Reference you can, for example •
initialize the reference configuration
•
generate and analyze deltas
•
commit the needed changes in the actual or reference configuration
Delta handling in CM Reference involves various steps. In the first stage, you need to initialize the reference configuration. After this, deltas are generated for visualizing and analyzing. You can select the deltas for a closer analysis and decide on the necessary actions to correct them. These corrective actions are called alignments. Updates can then be implemented either in the actual configuration or in the reference configuration.
Figure 186: CM Reference
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Flexible CM Search
Figure 187: Flexible CM Search Flexible CM Search is a web-based application for searching configuration management data in the actual configuration. In addition, you can also view the data in CM Editor and upload the actual configuration. You can search data based on: •
Name
•
Distinguished name
•
Instance ID
•
Cell identification
•
Hardware Serial Number
•
Managed object class
Flexible CM Search is a web application in NetAct Configurator. You can use it for searching GSM, WCDMA and LTE configuration management data in the actual configuration. You can also view the data in CM Editor and upload the actual configuration. Some functions may be disabled due to your license or permission. Opening Flexible CM Search 1. Log in to NetAct Start Page. 2. Click Configuration ► Flexible CM Search. Flexible CM Search opens.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
313
314
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
CM History CM History is a diagnostic and analytic tool which allows you to display all parameter value changes in a selected scope and time slot. Additionally, you can view managed object configuration in a given point of time and see managed object hierarchy in network topology. Moreover, you can compare the configuration of either one network element or two network elements and see the differences between the selected points in time. It is also possible to restore the selected configuration changes. CM History data requires a CM History technology-specific license. It is also possible to use the command line interface for initializing and synchronizing the CM History database, and for generating change report in the configuration data. The CM History database contains information on all changes such as creation, update, and deletion of managed object that have taken place in the network. The following configuration management operations can trigger these changes: •
Updates on the Configurator's actual database as a result of executing network element upload.
•
Updates of the Configurator's actual database originated from CCNs (Configuration Change Notifications) received from network element.
•
Updates of the actual configuration performed by internal CM services, which is for troubleshooting purposes, such as for example, Post Upload.
•
Network element integration.
•
Updates of the reference configuration performed by initializing or merging plans or the actual configuration.
Figure 188: CM History
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Hardware Management functionality
Figure 189: Hardware Management functionality and benefits The Hardware Management functionality is designed to manage hardware equipment in the network. NetAct Hardware Management offers the operator an upto-date knowledge of the existing network hardware equipment used in the service delivery. Hardware Management is designed to store and provide hardware resource inventory from the entire managed network. The users can easily search and examine hardware data from a remote location. The system saves the hardware information in the NetAct database, which can be updated regularly and viewed on a daily basis. By using the CM Operations Manager application, the user can perform the following operations for hardware management: •
Synchronize Hardware information and Schedule upload of NE data with NetAct: Included in the Actual Configuration Upload functionality.
•
Export data to XML / CSV file: Included in the Actual Configuration export functionality.
By using the CM Editor application, the user can perform the following operations for hardware management: •
Browse Hardware information
•
Search for information on a selected Hardware unit
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
315
316
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 190: Hardware Information Benefits of Hardware Management Hardware Management provides the following benefits: •
Better visibility of Hardware inventory, which then eliminates unnecessary site visits.
•
Reduction of downtime of a site after Hardware failure. Hardware Management provides information on a faulty unit.
•
An accurate serial number display facilitates tracking plug-in units as well as following the warranty of repaired units in more detail.
•
Boost of network operation and maintenance thanks to data integrity, accurate knowledge of network components, their status and availability.
•
Expedition of network troubleshooting actions resulting from the awareness of the equipment whereabouts.
•
Reduction of operational costs owing to fewer site visits and a smaller number of resources required for upgrades.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Configurator Basic User Tasks General Workflow The following figure illustrates the general data flow.
Figure 191: General Data Flow
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
317
318
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Sychronize Network Data Context In the Upload dialog you can sychronize network data and schedule an upload operation.
Figure 192: CM Operations Manager: Sychronize Network Data Perform the following steps to sychronize network data:
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Figure 193: Procedure: Sychronize Network Data Procedure 1
From any view, click Upload ► New Upload Result of this step The Upload dialog opens.
2
In the Upload dialog, select the target objects you want to upload under the tabs. Under each tab there is a tree listing the possible objects you can select. Result of this step The selected objects are shown in the Scope of Upload pane. If you do not have the correct license, some upload options are disabled.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
319
320
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
3
Select additional options for the upload (specific fort he NE type, for example HW upload).
4
In the Upload Information pane, enter a name of the upload operation (optional).
5
In the Upload Information pane, enter a description of the upload operation (optional).
6
In the Upload Information pane, select the level of information shown in the Feedback dialog.
7
To start the upload, click Start.
8
A confirmation dialog opens. Click Yes.
Result The Feedback dialog opens and the status of the upload operation changes to Started. You can monitor the progress of the operation on the Operation History tab or the Feedback dialog.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Hardware Configuration Upload / Export For importing the network elements hardware configuration to NetAct, execute the Operation "Actual Configuration Upload" as described in the corresponding previous section. In the same way, to export the hardware configuration execute "Actual Configuration Export" Task.
Figure 194: Single or bulk upload of HW configuration data bundled with CM upload The following figure illustrates the status of hardware synchronization.
Figure 195: Hardware Synchronization Status The following figure illustrates the single or bulk export of HW Configuration data to XML or CSV.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
321
322
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 196: Single or Bulk Export of HW Configuration data to XML or CSV The following figure illustrates the intelligent feature activation.
Figure 197: Intelligent Feature Activation
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Viewing Actual Configuration Context Actual configuration contains actual values from the network. These values can be edited to change actuals in the network or they can be used as planned values. The Actual Configuration node contains all objects in the topology, both operational (actual objects) and non-operational objects that exist in the topology. You can view actual parameter values only for the operational objects. The MO classes and their parent objects that are selected in the Editor View are shown in the CM Editor navigation tree.
Figure 198: CM Editor: Display of Current Configuration
Opening multiple plans at the same time has always been available, but now, they have been organized into a tabular view to help users switch between and identify which plan they are currently working on. The following figure illustrates the tabs of current configuration.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
323
324
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 199: CM Editor: Display of Current Configuration - Tabs Perform the following steps to view actual managed objects:
Figure 200: Procedure: Viewing Actual Configuration Procedure 1
Select Target Configuration ► Actual Configuration.
2
Expand the Actual Configuration node in the navigation tree. Result of this step A list of root objects is shown. They are sorted alphabetically in ascending order based on class and object instance.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
3
Expand the root objects. Information When expanding the managed objects, the hierarchy is shown first. The names of the managed objects are fetched separately and added to the tree when they are available.
Result of this step A list of managed objects is shown. 4
Select the objects that you want to view.
Result The Parameters by Actual Managed Object view opens. Here you can see the values for the actual managed objects in the network.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
325
326
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
CM Editor: View Filter Editor View defines which parameters and managed object classes are shown in plans, in the actual and reference configuration and how the parameters are grouped. The definitions in the selected editor view affect the navigation tree, as well as parameters by managed object, parameters by managed object classes, parameters by actual managed object and parameters by reference managed object views.
Figure 201: CM Editor: View Filter – Basic Parameters The following figure illustrates the advanced parameters of the view filter:
Figure 202: CM Editor: View Filter – Advanced Parameters The following figure illustrates the obselete parameters of the view filter.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Figure 203: CM Editor: View Filter – Obsolete Parameters
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
327
328
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Managing Working Sets Context You can view the list of existing working sets to use them in NetAct Configurator as well as view the content of working sets to see managed objects and their content. You can also navigate to related object(s) in the actual and reference configuration and copy the selected managed objects with or without their parameter values to a selected open plan.
Figure 204: CM Editor: Managing Working Sets Perform the following steps to view the list of existing working sets and manage working set content:
Figure 205: Procedure: Listing of existing working sets Procedure 1
In the CM Editor main window, click the Working Sets mode in the navigation tree. Information On the right side of the window, the available working sets are listed in the Working Set Name pane, and the managed objects related to these working sets are listed in the Assigned Managed Objects pane.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
2
To navigate to a related managed object, in the Assigned Managed Objects pane select one or more managed objects and click the Navigate to MO(s) button. Result of this step The target configuration with the selected corresponding managed objects is opened.
3
To copy the selected managed objects to an opened plan, in the Assigned Managed Objects pane click the Copy MO(s) to plan button. Result of this step The selected managed object(s) are copied to the selected plan.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
329
330
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Selecting Working Set to be used as filter Context You can also use working sets as a filter for the CM Editor navigation tree. You can filter actual, reference and planned configuration according to your selected options. Managed objects of an incoming relationship type, for example, adjacencies, mediators are not filtered out by working sets. Working sets selected as a filter prevent showing planned managed objects (objects whose state has been changed to: create, delete, modify) in the opened plans.
Figure 206: Procedure: Selecting Working Set to be used as filter Procedure 1
In the CM Editor tree, click the Working Sets mode.
2
Click Working Set(s) you are interested in to see the content of particular working set(s) in the Assigned Managed Objects pane.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
3
Select Working Set(s) you want to use for filtering by clicking the Filtering by Working Set(s)... button or right-clicking a given working set and from the context menu selecting Filter by Working Set(s)... or from the CM Editor menu bar selecting View and from the drop down menu selecting Filter by Working Set(s)... or press Ctrl + Shift + W. Information If you select working set(s) in the table you want to use for filtering, you can see their content. By selecting the option Filter by Working Set(s)... from the context menu or using the Filter by working Sets(s)... button, the chosen working set(s) are preselected in the Filter by Working Sets dialog. You can confirm the selection or change it, if needed.
Result of this step The Filter by Working Sets dialog opens with a list of available working sets. 4
Select Include children to see managed objects with all their child objects. Result of this step The selected filtered working sets are shown in the status bar at the bottom of the window. The actual configuration and plan nodes show managed objects based on whether you have chosen the Include children option or not in the filtered working sets.
Additional information Information about your selection: Children included or Children excluded is visible in the status bar.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
331
332
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Adding managed objects to working set(s) Context You can add the managed objects that fulfill the defined criteria in the Search and Modify Target Configuration dialog to a new or an already existing working set by clicking the Add to Working Set... button. You can also select one or multiple managed objects in the actual configuration tree or in a plan, regardless of their states (non-operational objects can be also selected) by right clicking managed object and, from the pop-up menu, selecting Add to Working Set.... If you want to return to the original state where all the managed objects are visible, right-click a given working set, from the context menu select Filter by Working Set(s)..., select desired working set(s), click the Filter by Working Set(s)... button, and from the Filter by Working Sets dialog uncheck a given working set. Alternatively, you can select Working Sets node from the tree view, select a given working set, click the Filter by Working Set(s)... button and from the Filter by Working Sets dialog uncheck a given working set. Perform the following steps to add managed objects to working set(s):
Figure 207: Procedure: Adding managed objects to working set(s) Procedure 1
In the CM Editor tree in the actual configuration or in the plan, select one or multiple managed objects, right click one of them and from the pop-up menu, select the Add to Working Set... option. Information Alternatively, in the Search and Modify Target Configuration dialog, click the Add to Working Set... button. Result of this step The Add to Working Set dialog opens.
2
In the Name field, provide a unique name for a new working set you want to add manged objects to. Information Alternatively, select the Add to existing working sets radiobox, and in the Working set name panel, select checkboxes of the working set(s) you want to add managed objects to. You can use the Filter field to find a desired working set.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
3
Click Add.
Result The selected managed objects have been created in a new working set or added to an already existing one(s), depending on the option you have chosen.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
333
334
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Creating working set from CM Query Context Perform the following steps to create a working set from CM Query:
Figure 208: Procedure: Creating working set from CM Query Procedure 1
Click Create new in the Working Sets pane. Result of this step The Create New Working Set pane opens.
2
Select the CM Query tab.
3
Enter the parameter name, select the adaptation and MO class from the dropdown list, and select a required operator and value. Information Alternativey, you can create more advanced queries by selecting And or Or operators and typing in the next parameter criteria. You can also narrow down your list, by entering an MO class name in the Include only certain managed object classes field.
Result of this step And and Or radio buttons and a new input field appears. In the Save Working Set pane, a list of managed objects with chosen criteria is displayed. 4
Enter a name of the created working set and choose either the Dynamic working set or Static working set option in the Save Working Set pane.
5
Click Save.
Result A new working set based on CM Query is created.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Modifying Parameters via Working Set Context Perform the following steps to modify parameters via working set:
Figure 209: Procedure: Modifying Parameters via Working Set Procedure 1
Open Working Set Manager under Administration category and create a working set from CM Advanced Query.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
335
336
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
In CM Editor, create a New Plan or select an existing plan to update your changes.
Information Working Sets automaticaly populate into other NetAct tools once created.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
3
Open the Plan.
a) Select your working set. b) Select the Managed Objects you want to modify parameters on c) Use Ctrl+A to select all. a) Push the Copy Managed Objects to Plan button located on the right. 4
Select the plan you want to modify.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
337
338
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
5
Go to Edit, select New Search and Modify from Selection.
6
Click on the little arrow located beside Modify.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
7
Modify and confirm which plan you want to insert changes.
Information Grayed out parameters cannot be modified. a) Press the Put Modifications to Plan button. b) Analyze and provision.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
339
340
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Deleting Objects from the NetAct CM Database Context Perform the following steps to delete the objects from the NetAct CM database.
Figure 210: Procedure: Deleting Objects from the NetAct CM Database Procedure 1
In CM Operations Manager, click Tools ► Workflow Engine.
2
In the drop down list located on the left, select NE data deletion from Configurator.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
3
In CM Editor, click Actual configuration and select the object you want to delete.
a) Right click and select Copy.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
341
342
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
4
Paste the object to be deleted in the left pane.
a) Press the little green arrow just below to move the MO to the right pane. b) Press start to complete the operation . The finished status can be viewed at the top of the pane. Result
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Additional Information The Interrupt button on the bottom grays out as shown in the image. If there are errors, you can use this screen or Operation History to get more information.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
343
344
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 211: NE data deletion from Configurator: Operation History
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Exporting Configuration Context
Figure 212: CM Operations Manager: Actual Configuration Export and Import Plan Data The following steps describes the exporting configuration.
Figure 213: Procedure: Exporting Configuration Procedure 1
From the File menu, open the Export dialog.
2
In the Scope of Export pane, click Options. Result of this step The Export Options dialog opens.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
345
346
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
3
Select Actual or Reference Configuration. a) From the Export drop-down list, select either Actual Configuration or Reference Configuration. Result of this step The plan is exported on the top of actual or reference configuration.
4
Select Export format, Profile file, and Parameters. a) From the Export format drop-down list, select either RAML2.0 or CSV (comma-separated values). Information If you have selected RAML2.0, Profile file is not active. If you have selected CSV, click the ... button next to the Profile file field. Select the profile that you want to use. For information about profile files, see Working with profile files and CSV data files in CSV Interface for Configuration Management Data in Operating Documentation.
Result of this step A file selection dialog opens. b) In the Export pane, select the parameter values that you want to use. Information Internal values - These are values used in the database. Alternatively, UI values - These are the values that you can see in other applications (for example, CM Editor). The selected format will be used for the export, and for CSV export, the selected profile file and parameters will be used.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Export / Import data with CM Editor The Export / Import data with CM Editor is described in the following sections: •
To export relationship plan using CM Editor ► Table Editor.
•
To import relationship plan using CM Editor.
•
To interrupt the import operation.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
347
348
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Exporting relationship plan using CM Editor - Table Editor Context
Figure 214: CM Editor: Export Plan Perform the following steps to export relationship plan using CM Editor ► Table Editor.
Figure 215: Procedure: Exporting relationship plan using CM Editor
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Procedure 1
In the CM Editor application, open Table Editor. Information For planned managed objects with assigned template, parameters not changed directly by user (which value is inherited only from template) are not exported. Exported info about used template is used during import to assign values to managed objects.
2
In the Table Editor, click the Export button. Information You can also choose the Export relationship plan option in CM Editor by clicking the Plan tab. Result of this step The Export relationship plan dialog opens.
3
In the Export relationship plan dialog, click ....
4
In the File Name field, type a name for the export file.
5
From the Files of Type drop-down list, choose the .csv file type.
6
Click OK. Information You can also select different parameters by ticking the following checkboxes: •
Include children Exports parameters of all the managed objects' descendants.
•
Include incoming adjacencies Includes parameters of incoming adjacencies.
•
Include related objects Exports parameters of managed objects which are in a close logical relation. For example: WBTS ► IPBR, IPBR ► WBTS, WCEL ► RET, RET ► WCEL, ADJS ► HOPS, HOPS ► ADJS.
•
7
Include all parameters definitions exports all parameters including parameters without value.
Cick the Start button.
Result The export file is generated. The Progress bar indicates the progress of the operation both in percentage and in number of the managed objects. When the operation finishes, the selections are available again.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
349
350
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
If you want to import relationship plan exported from Table Editor, you need to perform it using CM Editor.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Importing relationship plan using CM Editor Context Perform the following steps to import relationship plan using CM Editor:
Figure 216: Procedure: Importing relationship plan using CM Editor Procedure 1
Open CM Editor.
2
In the navigation tree, select Open Plans and choose the desired plan.
3
Click Plan ► Import Relationship Plan. Information You can also open the Import Relationship Plan dialog by right-clicking the plan in the list and from the pop-up menu select Import Relationship Plan.
4
Click ... and choose the IPlan csv file which you want to import.
5
Click the Start button.
Result After the Import operation, you can see the number of objects involved in errors and warnings generated by the Import operation. This information is visible in the Import Status pane of the Import dialog. The current situation of the operation is indicated in Action. When the file is Imported , you can access the Import log with the buttons in the Import Status pane: Full Log..., Errors..., Warnings...
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
351
352
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Displaying plans Context When you open a plan, it is shown in the navigation tree under the Opened Plans node.
Figure 217: CM Editor: Display of Plans Perform the following steps to open a plan. Procedure 1
Click Plan ► Open Plan. Information Alternatively, Right-click the Opened Plans node in the navigation tree and select Open Plan from the pop-up menu. Alternatively, on the toolbar, click the Open Plan icon. Alternatively, try to expand the Opened Plans node when it does not contain any opened plans. The Open Plan dialog opens containing a list of plans in the NetAct Configurator database. The plans are sorted alphabetically in ascending order based on the plan name. The table also contains the plans you have already opened in the navigation tree. The table contains the following information on each plan: •
Plan
•
Owner
•
Created
You can filter the listed plans by selecting the check box on the left and entering the filter criteria in the Filter Plans by field.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Mass parameter changes and plan creation The following figure illustrates the mass parameter changes and plan creation.
Figure 218: CM Editor: Mass Parameter change and Plan Creation The following figure illustrates the view of plan details.
Figure 219: CM Editor – Viewing Plan Details
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
353
354
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Changing Mass Parameter Context You can mass modify managed objects from the actual configuration based on given criteria. The Modify extension only works if the search returns the objects of one object class. If there are objects from several object classes, the Modify extension will not open. Perform the following steps to mass modify the managed objects:
Figure 220: Procedure: Mass modify managed objects
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Procedure 1
Search for the corresponding managed objects from the database. a) When you want to search the whole network, Select Edit ► Search and Modify Target Configuration... Information Alternatively, Select Search and Modify Target Configuration... from the Managed Objects pop-up menu. Alternatively, Select Search and Modify Target Configuration... from the Actual Configurations or Reference Configurations pop-up menu Select Search and Modify Target Configuration... from a pop-up menu of any MO in the plan or in the actuals/reference tree. Click the Search and Modify Target Configuration icon on the toolbar. b) From the Name drop-down list, select the name of the search. Information You can filter the searches by adding, for example, abc to the Name field and then clicking Enter. c) If needed, edit the searches in the Query field. Validate the changes to the syntax by clicking Validate Syntax. d) Enter a value for the required parameters into the Parameter table. Information The values should be entered as UI values. A short description of the parameter is shown in the tooltip when you move the cursor over the value field. The value field is shown in red if the value is not valid. e) Click Count Objects if you want to see how many managed objects can be found with the given criteria. Information The count is shown next to the button after you have pressed it. In case the count takes a long time, it can be interrupted by clicking Stop. f)
2
Click Search to start the search for the MO(s) with the criteria you have given.
Click Modify to open the mass modify extension to the Search and Modify Target Configuration dialog.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
355
356
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
3
Enter the values for the parameters to be modified in the parameter list. Information The parameter list contains parameters for all versions of the selected MO class. If a modified object does not have the given parameter, it is ignored. Values are given as UI values and a cell is shown in red if the value is not valid for any of the versions of the MO class. In case a parameter has an invalid value, the Create New Plan With Modifications button is also disabled.
4
Click Create New Plan With Modifications to add the given values for the objects found by the given criteria into a new plan.
Result A working dialog is shown until the operation is ready, after which an information dialog is shown informing you of how many objects were modified. A new plan is created with the default name, and the plan node is selected from the tree. The plan contains the modified managed objects.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Creating Plan Context You can create a new plan by creating an empty plan and adding modifications to it. Perform the following steps to create a new plan:
Figure 221: Procedure: Creating a new plan Procedure 1
Select Plan ► New Plan... Information Alternatively, In the toolbar, click New Plan. Alternatively, Right-click the Opened Plans node in the Navigation tree and select New Plan from the pop-up menu.
Result of this step The new plan is added to the navigation tree. The Plan Header view is shown in the main view. The application has given a name for the plan, but you can modify the plan name. 2
Type in a new name and a description for the plan.
3
To save the modified information, click Update.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
357
358
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
4
To add modifications to the plan and to see managed objects, check that the Show Managed Objects in Plans option is selected and expand the nodes under the Managed Objects node. Information You can select objects in the tree and change their operation. For instructions, see Changing the managed object operation. You can also directly edit managed object parameters.
5
To create new managed objects, see Creating new managed objects in the plan in Operating Documentation.
6
To modify the parameter values of the managed objects, see Editing parameters in Operating Documentation.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Checking Plans Context CM Analyzer allows the user to check radio network and core network parameters and managed objects to ensure that the parameters are defined according to consistency rules and that no essential information is missing. The user can check for discrepancies in the actual and reference configurations. Nokia provides a set of basic consistency rules. The user can also create own rules using an external text or XML editor. To check for errors and inconsistencies in network configuration, you need to define a target for your check, and select the rule(s) against which the target configuration is checked.
Figure 222: CM Analyzer Usage: Checking Plans Perform the following steps to start a new check:
Figure 223: Procedure: Checking Plans
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
359
360
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Procedure 1
Click Check ► New Check.... Information Alternatively, in the toolbar, click New Check. Alternatively, in table of checks, right-click and select New Check... from the pop-up menu.
Result of this step The New Check dialog opens. 2
In the Check Name field, enter a name for the check. Information This step is optional.
3
On the Rules tab, you can select the individual rules and rule sets that you want to run. Select an item from the List rules by drop-down list. Information The tree in the pane below the List rules by drop-down list is organized according to the selected item.
4
To select a rule or a rule set, check the boxes to the left of the rule or rule sets in the upper pane. Information You can also drag and drop, or copy and paste rules from the upper pane or from the Rules tab of the main window. For instructions on drag and drop, see Using drag and drop in Generic Help. For instructions on copying and pasting, see Copying/cutting and pasting. You can also click on the rule or rule set to select it and then right-click and select Add to Selected Rules from the pop-up menu or select a rule and press the Space bar. You can also drag and drop, or copy and paste rules from the Rules tab of the main window. To select several rules at once, press the SHIFT key and select the rules of your choice.
Result of this step They will automatically be displayed in the lower pane. 5
To remove a rule from the lower pane, select a rule and press the Delete key. Information Alternatively, Right-click the selected rule and select Remove From Selected Rules from the pop-up menu.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
6
On the Check Target tab, Check Target drop-down menu, select the target configuration for the check. Information The target can be: 1. 2. 3. 4.
7
Actual Configuration Plan on top of Actual Configuration Reference Configuration Plan on top of Reference Configuration
If you selected Plan on top of Actual Configuration or Plan on top of Reference Configuration, select a name or any user from the Show plans owned by drop-down list. a) Select one plan from the table. Information A description for the selected plan is shown in the Description of Plan (plan name) pane at the bottom of the tab. Alternatively, if you selected Actual Configuration or Reference Configuration, mark the desired checkboxes to display the managed objects in the lower pane. You can also drag and drop, or copy and paste the managed objects to the lower pane. You can also drag and drop, or copy and paste the objects, for example, from CM Editor or from the Check Scope tab in the main window.
8
On the Post-Check Actions tab, you can set CM Analyzer to automatically correct the inconsistencies it has found (if the rules support autocorrection). Information You can also set CM Analyzer to automatically send e-mail messages about the checks it has completed and automatically include check results in these e-mail messages.
9
Click Start Check.
Result The dialog closes and the check starts. The check will appear in the table of checks in the main window, where you can monitor its progress.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
361
362
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Provisioning Plans Context You can prepare a plan, provision a plan, schedule a provision operation, and create a backup plan in the Provision dialog. The provisioning operations are: Activate, Pre-Activate, Activate Pre-Activated Plan, Fall Back RNC RNW, Validate. Plan preparation can be run as part of the provisioning operation or it can also be run before provisioning as a separate operation. In the Plans list, you can see the preparation status for your plan. It is recommended that the entire plan is provisioned as one operation.
Figure 224: CM Operations Manager: Plan Provisioning 1/2 Perform the following steps to prepare a plan:
Figure 225: Procedure: Preparing Plans
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Procedure 1
In the Plans tab, select the plan you want to prepare.
2
Open the Provision dialog. Click Plan ► Provision... Information Alternatively, Right-click the plan and select Provision... in the pop-up menu. Result of this step The Provision dialog opens.
3
In the Provision pane, enter an optional name and description for the provisioning operation.
4
In the Operation pane of the Provision dialog, check Prepare Plan operation and uncheck Provision operation. Information The provision operation is checked by default. If the plan has not been prepared yet, the prepare plan operation is also checked by default.
5
Click the Start button. Result of this step A confirmation dialog opens.
6
In the confirmation dialog, click Yes. Information Procedure: Provisioning plans is described in the next topic.
Result The Feedback dialog opens and the status of the operation changes to Started. You can monitor the progress of the operation on the Operation History tab or in the Feedback dialog.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
363
364
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Procedure: Provisioning plans Context
Figure 226: CM Operations Manager: Plan Provisioning 2/2 Perform the following steps to provision plans:
Figure 227: Procedure: Provisioning plans Procedure 1
On the Plans tab, select the plan you want to provision.
2
Open the Provision dialog. Click Plan ► Provision... Information Right-click the plan and select Provision... in the pop-up menu. Result of this step The Provision dialog opens.
3
In the Provision pane, enter an optional name and description for the provision operation.
4
In the Scheduling pane, you can define a schedule for the operation.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
5
In the Backup pane, you can create a backup plan for your plan. Information By using the backup plan, you can roll back the network changes made by your original plan. The backup plan is always created for the entire plan. The default name of the backup plan is derived from the plan name: _backup__. In the default name, is the current date in yyyymmdd format, and is the activation time in hhmm format. Another backup plan is automatically created for a GSM plan when file-based provisioning is not used.
6
In the Operation pane, select the provisioning operation you want to run.
7
If you want to provision the plan partially, deselect Entire Plan and select the objects to be included in the operation from each tab. Information In the Scope pane, Entire Plan is selected by default. Select the Upload after activation checkbox in the Options pane to automatically upload actual configuration from network after provisioning operation.
8
Click the Start button. Result of this step A confirmation dialog opens.
9
In the confirmation dialog, click Yes.
Result The Feedback dialog opens and the status of the provision operation changes to Started. You can monitor the progress of the operation on the Operation History tab or in the Feedback dialog.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
365
366
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Comparing plans to actual configuration Context You can compare your plans to the actual configuration by using the Compare dialog. You can review radio network change plans, compare reports and configuration data history as well as verify that all planned changes were implemented correctly.
Figure 228: CM Operations Manager: Plan Actual Compare Perform the following steps to compare plans to actual configuration:
Figure 229: Procedure: Comparing plans to actual configuration
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Procedure 1
Click Plan ► Compare. Result of this step The Compare dialog opens.
2
Enter the name of the operation to the Name field (optional).
3
Check the Generate Delta Plan check box (optional). Information When checked, a delta plan of the differences between the plan and actual configuration will be generated. Plan will contain the actual configuration values of the differences. You can give a new name to the delta plan, or accept the default name that is given in the Name field.
4
Select Level of Feedback. Information The possible values are Summary, Object, or Parameter. The default value is Summary.
5
•
Summary Gives a short summary in a format of number of differences found from the plan against the actual configuration.
•
Object Lists the managed object differences and number of parameter differences against the actual configuration. One feedback summarizes non-existing managed objects in the actual configuration or the number of differences found in parameters per managed object in the plan against the actual configuration.
•
Parameter Gives feedback about non-existing managed objects in actual configuration and parameters whose values are different in the plan against the actual configuration.
Click the Start button. Result of this step A confirmation dialog opens.
6
In the confirmation dialog, click Yes.
Result The Feedback dialog opens and the status of the operation changes to Started. You can monitor the progress of the operation on the Operation History tab or the feedback dialog.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
367
368
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Searching Managed Objects with Flexible CM Search
Figure 230: Flexible CM Search Operations: CM Upload from CM Search Results You can search data based on: •
Name
•
Distinguished name
•
Instance ID
•
Cell identification
•
Hardware Serial Number
•
Managed object class
The searching of managed objects with flexible CM search is described as follows: Searching data by distinguished name (DN) You can search managed objects by DN or part of a DN. It is not necessary to include the PLMN-PLMN prefix. For example, •
LNBTS-767/LNCEL-1
•
RNC-184/WBTS-174
•
WBTS-174/WCEL-1
•
BSC-74150/BCF-20/BTS-21
Searching data by instance ID Search controller-level MRBTS, RNC, and BSC objects by instance ID. The managed object class and instance ID are required. For example, •
RNC-123
•
BSC-123
Searching data by cell identification Search LTE, WCDMA, and GSM cells by cell identification parameters, CI, and LAC, which match the network parameters.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Table 14: Cell Identification parameters Technology
Object class
Cell identification parameters
LTE
LNCEL
E-UTRAN cell identifier (eutraCelId)
WCDMA
WCEL
Cell identifier (Cid)
GSM
BTS
CI(cellId and LAC (locationAreaIdLAC)
Examples: ci 436737 ci=8 lac=9 ci 8 lac 9 Viewing details To see the name and identification parameters of a search result, click Details. You can see the following parameters if they are defined in the actual configuration. •
•
•
WCEL identification •
WCELMCC / WCELMNC
•
Cid / Rncld
Additional parameters for WCEL •
UARFCN
•
LAC / RAC
•
PriScrCode
•
earfcnDL, earfcnUL
•
phyCellId
•
tac
BTS identification •
cellId
•
locationAreaIdLAC, locationAreaIdMCC, locationAreaIdMNC
•
Additional parameters for BTS
•
rac
•
bsIdentityCodeBCC, bsIdentityCodeNCC
•
LNCEL identification
•
mcc, mnc
•
parent LNBTS ID (title: Macro eNB identifier)
•
lcrId
Opening search hits in CM Editor You can open the search hits in CM Editor. You need to have CM Editor open to be able to click Open in CM Editor... In CM Editor, the managed objects in your search hits are selected in the actual configuration tree. © Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
369
370
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Operations with CM History The sections covered in the following topics: •
Generating report on parameter changes
•
Viewing historical configuration snapshots of NEs
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Generating report on parameter changes Context The Timeline tab allows you to search configuration changes for a provided managed object DN in a given time slot. The search scope can be limited by a desired editor view or by a particular change context option. As a result, you get a report with all the changes made in the network. This data can be utilized for searching, browsing, and analyzing configuration changes, which can help in network troubleshooting. The results can be exported to a CSV file for further analysis.
Figure 231: CM History Operations: Generating Reports on Parameter Changes Perform the following steps to generate report on parameter changes:
Figure 232: Procedure: Generating Reports on Parameter Changes Procedure 1
Select the Timeline tab.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
371
372
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
From the drop-down list, select a scope for the changes. Information If you select the Entire network option, all network configuration changes are displayed. You can also select DNs containing, and in the field next to it you can provide one of the following: •
Whole DN of the managed object you are interested in, and then you have only one result of the search.
•
Exact segment of the DN, for example, ANTL-1, which shows all MRBTSs which have ANTL-1 managed object/
•
Partial DN with asterisk, for example, if you type MRBTS-1/LNBTS-1/LNCEL*, all LNCEL managed objects under this MRBTS-1/LNBTS-1 with child objects are displayed.
3
From the drop-down list, select Actual Configuration or Reference Configuration.
4
From the Past drop-down list, select one of the options such as: 24 hours, 7 days or 1 month. Information You can also set the exact time period by clicking the small arrows and selecting the dates from the calendar views. In the calendar, click the Now button to set the current date and time.
5
From the Editor View drop-down list, you can select a desired editor view to limit the displayed data.
6
To update the Editor View drop-down list, click the Refresh Editor Views icon next to it. Result of this step All the editor views visible in CM History were created in CM Editor and are stored in the database.
7
From the Change context drop-down lists, select a pair of values you are interested in. Information Change context is additional information about changes performed on a given managed object.
8
Select the Include children checkbox to see the children of the selected managed object DN.
9
Select the Show only changes checkbox to view only the managed objects which contain changes for a given DN.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
10 Click the Generate Report button. Information If you have provided the whole DN in the field, then the whole tree is expanded. If there are few search results, then only the first level of managed objects is shown. Due to technical limitations, in some cases it is not possible to expand the whole tree. In the brackets next to the managed objects listed in the tree, there are a number of changes on this object and its children performed at different timestamps. Expand the tree as needed and select one or more managed objects: •
In the tree, right click on a managed object and from the pop-up menu choose Select children. As a result, all changes of the selected managed object along with the changes to its child objects are loaded into the results table. In case of a lack of virtual memory on the system, results may not be displayed. In such a case, narrow the selection scope by choosing a child object under the originally selected managed object.
•
Alternatively, Press the Ctrl key and select the desired managed objects. As a result, all their changes are loaded into the results table.
•
Alternatively, In the tree, select one managed object. Hold down the Shift key and select an additional managed object. As a result, all managed objects between the selected two are automatically selected. Only expanded managed objects which are visible in the tree are selected. All changes of the selected managed objects are loaded into the results table. Their child objects are not loaded into the results table. Managed object's parameter value changes are presented in the table on the right hand side of the window.
Result of this step On the left side of the window, you can see the navigation tree with the managed objects hierarchy matching the earlier selected search criteria. 11 In the Comments field, you can provide additional information on the selected change. When you click the Save comment button, the comment for the selected change is saved in the database. 12 Under the main table, on the right hand side, click the Export button to export the results to a CSV file. Result of this step Only the changes visible in the table are exported to a file. The exported file also contains the Change context information.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
373
374
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Viewing historical configuration snapshots of NEs Context This functionality allows viewing a historical configuration snapshot of a network element at a given point of time. You can display the configuration for both actual and reference configuration. You can select a suitable editor view and include or exclude child objects. As a result, you get a configuration snapshot report based on your selection. The View Configuration tab look and feel is based on CM Editor and you can see the managed object hierarchy in the navigation tree. You can view parameters and their values of a selected managed object in a configuration snapshot report. Additionally, you can manipulate the way data is displayed in a generated report according to your preferences and filter the report content.
Figure 233: CM History Operations: Viewing Historical Configuration Snapshot of NE Perform the following steps to view historical configuration:
Figure 234: Procedure: Viewing Historical Configuration Snapshot of NE
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Procedure 1
On the View Configuration tab, enter the entire managed object path. Information For example PLMN-PLMN/BSC-1/BCF-1, or exact segment, for example BCF-1 or BSC-1/BCF-1, in the DN containing field. Use the * (asterisk) wildcard after or before the managed object DN in the DN containing field to search for all managed objects consisting of a typed string. If you type BCF*, all the BCF managed objects with child objects are displayed.
2
Define the target by selecting either Actual Configuration or Reference Configuration in the Target field.
3
Define the date and time for the selected snapshot.
4
Select an editor view to limit the content displayed in the configuration snapshot report. a) In the Editor View field click the arrow on the right side of the field and select a desired view.
5
Click the Refresh Editor Views icon on the right side of the editor view field to make sure that the latest changes on editor views are included. Information If you want to change the editor view, you need to press the View Configuration button after changing it.
6
Check the Include children checkbox if you want to have the child objects included and displayed in the configuration snapshot report. Information The Include children option is checked by default. If you uncheck this option, you get the managed object(s) defined in the DN containing field. In case of using the * (asterisk) wildcard after the managed object DN, even if you uncheck the Include children option, child objects are included in the configuration snapshot report.
7
Click View Configuration. Result of this step You get a configuration snapshot report that consists of: •
Navigation tree
•
Table including the Parameter column which displays all parameters and the Value column which shows parameter values within the selected target and timestamp
•
Parameter Description pane
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
375
376
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Lab exercise: HW Inventory Management Context This section tests the students on: •
Ensuring synchronization of NetAct and the NEs.
•
Export of the HW data.
Figure 235: Lab exercise: HW Inventory Management Procedure 1
Perform an upload of the Network Elements you want to see. Ensure to select the HW button located at the bottom. Result of this step Why should we upload before anything else? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
2
From CM operations manager, Perform an export actual configuration of the NEs you need. Information Ensure you select the HW button and unselect everything else to ensure you only get the HW data. Result of this step Which tools can be used to view the output of this command? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Lab exercise: CM tools Context Perform the following steps for CM tools:
Figure 236: CM tools, 1/2
Figure 237: CM tools, 2/2 Procedure 1
Create a new plan. Modify and/or delete some objects in your plan.
2
Create a new WBTS to your plan (under RNC-11). a) Add WCEL under your WBTS. Information Remember to fill all the mandatory parameters. b) Create additional two WCELs under your WBTS by using New MO from Selected MO functionality. c) Create new SITE object and assign it to your WBTS.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
377
378
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
3
Create new ANTE (antenna) object under ANTC (Antenna collection). a) Create new WCAL (WCDMA Cell Antenna Link) under your ANTE. b) Link your WCAL to one of your WCELs. Information Enter Linked Cell DN parameter from WCAL object to do that. You should now be able to view WCAL as related managed object under your WCEL. Result of this step What is the difference between deleting and removing object? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
4
Create your own Editor view. Information You can decide the kind of view you want to create. For example, view for creating 3G Sites, WCEL parameter retuning view.
5
Create your own template for WBTS object. a) Create a plan by using your own template. b) Create another template for WCEL by using values of PLMN-PLMN/WBTS-26/WCEL-261. Information To create the template, you have to first copy parameters from actual to (temporary) plan and then from plan to actual. c) Create one WCEL under your WBTS by using the template you created.
6
Mass modify by using Table Editor and Editor View created in step 4.
7
Use Search and Modify to select all WCELs from your actual configuration and create a backup plan.
8
Use Search and Modify to build a search that will search all WCELs that have the cell id greater than 100 and are HSDPA capable. Information Save the search after you have tested it.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
9
Use CM Analyzer to analyze the plan you created in step 1. a) Add Creating_Sites_3G rule set to your check. b) Fix as many errors as you can with CM Editor and keep analyzing your plan.
10 Use CM Rule Editor to create rules of both different types (Compare and Condition) and test it with the CM Analyzer. 11 Make Actual data export with CM Operations Manager of your actual configuration (Select RNC-11 and/or some MRBTS’s) in RAML format. 12 Import the data you exported in the previous step with CM Operations Manager as a plan. a) Check the plan with the CM Editor. 13 Create a new SITE Template for eNodeB (use eNB26 or 27). a) Input name and description to the template. b) Open ASC_template.xml file from G:\ drive in Warsaw lab environment and save it under a different name. c) Edit this template file so that the MRBTSs parameter siteTemplateDescription is matching the description that you gave to your site template. d) Further edit the template file and replace all XXXs with your (unique) site id and save the file. 14 Open workflow engine from CM Operations manager and select Autoconfiguration eNodeB planning workflow. a) Start executing the workflow with your own template (now an initial plan). b) Check the output of operations and check the plan file in the CM Editor between the steps. Result of this step What does it contain and how does it change after different steps? ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ 15 Activate auto identification from workflow engine and check if the PREBTS object was created under dedicated iOMS.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
379
380
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Optimizer Optimizer Overview NetAct Optimizer is used in the statistical network-wide optimization process in NetAct. Optimizer provides visibility to current network behavior by combining actual GSM, WCDMA and LTE network configuration parameters and measured performance statistics with advanced visualization and analysis functionality. Parameters can be optimized manually for small changes or automatically by choosing from the range of optimization solutions provided by Optimizer. Optimizer can be used for a single cell or for a whole region, or even across multiple regions. The result of optimization algorithms can be visualized on a geographical map before downloading the optimization plan to the network. The plan with the changed parameters is sent to the NetAct Configurator where it is validated and provisioned to the network. •
Optimizer uses statistical performance measurement data As the input data for algorithms is accurate (measurements of a real network), the output is also more accurate than with a signal-propagation-estimate-based process in a planning tool.
•
Using measurements makes the tuning process faster Instead of heavy calculations based on raster map - where, for example, the interference matrix is calculated by considering signal strengths in each map pixel - a mobile measurement report is used. When the data is processed in Optimizer, only some analysis is needed.
•
Increased level of automation With Optimizer, the whole optimization cycle is faster than with planning tools. As Optimizer is implemented in the NetAct Framework, the actual configuration data and measurement reports are available for processing. The network topology in Optimizer is always consistent with the actual network data. When running Optimizer for the first time, some customizing is needed, such as parameters needed to guide the generation algorithms. Once the parameters are set, the next optimization round is more effortless.
•
Self Organizing Networks (SON) solution NetAct Optimizer is a key component in the Nokia Self Organizing Networks Suite. The Optimizer for SON solution provides complete element level optimization for real time SON functions.
The Optimizer solution is composed of basic and optional functionalities. The basic licenses for GSM, WCDMA and LTE include, for example, visualization based on a geographical map and manual adjacency and parameter management. The following functionalities are optional and require separate licenses: •
GSM – WCDMA automated adjacency optimization
•
GSM –WCDMA performance optimization
•
GSM - WCDMA capacity analysis
•
Call location analysis
•
Antenna tilt optimization
•
Optimization of intra LTE neighbor relations (adjacency blacklisting)
•
Mobility robustness optimization
•
Multivendor support
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Figure 238: Functionality Overview NetAct Optimizer The following figure illustrates the NetAct optimizer concept.
Figure 239: NetAct Optimizer Concept
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
381
382
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Optimizer main user interface
Figure 240: Optimizer : Main User Interface The following figure illustrates the efficient visualization and analysis.
Figure 241: Optimizer: Efficient visualization and analysis The following figure illustrates seamless multi-vendor network optimization.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
Figure 242: Optimizer: Seamless multi-vendor network optimization The Optimizer main user interface consists of the following panes: the Navigator pane, the Map/Tool pane, the Browser pane, the Scopes pane, and the Cell Groups pane. The tool views open into these panes. If several tool views open into the same pane, each tool view has its own tab that you can close if needed. The main user interface also contains the main menu bar and the main toolbar. The availability of a tool view depends on the purchased Optimizer software license. The tool views can be accessed from the Tools menu of the main menu bar or by using the pop-up menus of Navigator, Browser, Map or the Scopes pane. The practical optimization and analysis work happens always in the context of tool view(s) and with the defined optimization scope (target). The optimization scope is selected from the main window, which opens by default when Optimizer is started. It is the core workspace for object browsing, navigation, and manual optimization. Each tool view may have different scope selected for optimization at the same time. Navigator pane By default, Navigator opens into this pane. Navigator offers four tree views that are suitable for different optimization purposes: the Default view, the Hardware Topology view, the Adjacency Management view, and the Capacity Management view. For example, you can use a different tree view presentation depending on whether you optimize adjacencies or browse or tune objects of the hardware topology. Navigator contains objects that can be selected for optimization and for closer viewing and modifying. From Navigator, the selected network objects can also be located on Map and listed to Browser. Right-clicking an object in Navigator opens a pop-up menu that allows you to, for example, list elements to Browser or start optimization tools. The contents of Navigator’s pop-up menu depend on the view that is currently open in Navigator, which object has been selected, and what is the status of the object (actual, deleted, modified, created). Map/Tool pane By default, Map opens into this pane. Map is used to show the network objects and related configuration and performance data, and optimization results on a geographical (scanned and/or digital) map. Map can also be used for manual adjacency management.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
383
384
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Cell Groups/Scopes By default, the Scopes tool view and the Cell Groups tool view open into this pane. In the Scopes tool view, you can create, modify, and delete tailored scopes. You can use the tailored scope as a starting point for different optimization tools. Scopes are always global. The Cell Groups tool view helps in visualizing and managing cell groups. You can create, modify, delete, hide, unhide and rename cell groups, revert to default cell groups and change the generality of the cell groups. To be able to manage cell groups (create, modify, and so on) you need either the Optimizer Administrator role or the Optimizer Provisioning User role assigned to you. Other than admin users can only view the cell groups as well as cell group properties. The cell groups are arranged in a particular order both in the Cell Groups pane and in the Visualization pane, the most general cell group being highest on the list and the least general cell group lowest on the list. The generality of the cell groups can be modified using the Move cell group up and Move cell group down icons in the Cell Groups pane toolbar. Browser pane By default, Browser and the Use Cases tool view open into this pane. Note that Browser is not open when Optimizer is started but only when an element or elements are listed to Browser. In Browser, you can visualize CM or PM data and any combination of CM and PM data. With Browser, you can browse and edit objects in a table view. Object filtering and mass editing are supported. From Browser, you can export data to a CSV (Comma Separated Values) file. For instructions, see Using the Find/Replace functionality of Browser and Exporting data from Browser in Optimizer Help. You can change the view in Browser. You can hide rows by using filtering, change the column order by dragging and dropping them, and change the columns to be displayed through editing Browser profiles. For instructions, see Changing the view in Browser in Optimizer Help. In Browser you can view and edit the parameter values of multiple objects. You can sort the object parameters in Browser for the session only or on a more permanent basis by defining a profile. For instructions, see Sorting objects in Browser in Optimizer Help. With the Browser profile management functionality you can customize the view of the object parameters and the object relations for your own purposes, or you can share your profiles with other users. The Browser profiles support object hierarchy but are always determined according to the parent object. The lower level (child) objects can be freely selected. Browser has a set of default profiles (for each object type) that all users can always use when Optimizer is open. For more information, see Managing profiles in Browser in Optimizer Help. Visualizations pane This pane opens by clicking the Visualizations icon on the Map tool bar. The Visualizations pane allows you to define which objects are visualized on Map as well as quality indicators for these objects. You can also manage visualization profiles in this pane.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Configuration Management
The tabbed windows of Optimizer - for example Map, Browser, Key Performance Indicators - can be opened in a new window. To do this, rightclick the tab and select Open in New Window. This functionality is particularly useful if you have a dual-screen monitor in use.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
385
386
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Summary: Configuration Management Module Summary This module covered the following learning objectives: •
Explain the purpose of Configuration Management.
•
List the NetAct Configurator applications and explain their purpose.
•
Use the Configurator tools for executing basic tasks for configuration management.
•
Explain the Radio Optimization Process in NetAct and the main functionalities of Optimizer.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
License management in NetAct Module Objectives • • • • •
Describe NetAct licensing concepts. Describe NetAct Software Asset Protection. Use License Manager to check licenses. Use Software Asset Monitoring. Describe LTE and SRAN Licenses.
NetAct licensing concepts NetAct Licensing The NetAct system as such is delivered with all the functions, called the NetAct sales features, that are implemented in a particular release. On the other hand, not all functions are available for use. You can unlock these functions, using license key files ordered from Nokia. Only a valid software license allows you to use a licensebased application, service, solution, or function. This behavior is related to the NetAct software asset protection concept which assumes that all the NetAct sales features are protected with license keys and without the order of proper license, the NetAct software is not used. The NetAct software asset protection concept introduces license protection for the NetAct features, network elements integration, the NetAct capacity, the NetAct software release upgrade, as well as term licensing model. As a part of the NetAct software asset protection concept, NetAct software release upgrade, NetAct hard lock and NetAct license alarms functions are implemented to ensure proper system operation, and lucid way of the NetAct licenses handling. License Manager is the application that is used for managing software licenses in NetAct. Software Asset Monitoring is the application that enables monitoring of the NetAct Standard Software capacity features for NetAct Radio.
Figure 243: NetAct SW Licensing Overview License keys The following figure illustrates the license keys:
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
387
388
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 244: License types NetAct Sales Features are protected with License Keys. To unblock desired feature or function you need to order and install a proper License Key. All the licenses are bound to each NetAct instance with own Target ID, which means they cannot be moved between different instances. NetAct is licensed with using different types of licenses. In general licenses can be divided into: •
Term licenses
•
Functional and capacity licenses
Functional and capacity licenses The functional and capacity licenses are categorized as follows: •
On/Off licenses On/Off licenses enable functions and permit the use of licensed software functionality for one or more features or applications.
•
Capacity licenses Capacity licenses enable functions with volume/capacity limitation based on indicators agreed in the contract.
Time based licensing notifications The following figure illustrates the time based licensing notifications:
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Figure 245: Time based licensing notifications
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
389
390
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
NetAct software asset protection NetAct hard lock
Figure 246: Hard Lock mechanism The NetAct software asset protection concept includes the NetAct software release upgrade protection, the NetAct hard lock protection, and the NetAct alarms. As a part of the NetAct software asset protection concept, NetAct hard lock is introduced. NetAct hard lock is associated with validity of the license file and affects licensed features availability. Hard lock is triggered for license keys which are expired or if license key capacity is exceeded and results in turning features off in case of no RTU (Right To Use).
Figure 247: NetAct capacity Standard SW: Concept NetAct hard lock for capacity licenses Hard lock for NetAct capacity licenses applies to the NetAct Standard software sales features. For capacity licenses hard lock is activated in case licensed feature capacity is crossed. As a result new network element integration is blocked, as well as configuration management functionality. If the Software Asset Monitoring application detects that capacity of the NetAct Standard SW license is exceeded, critical alarm is raised and hard lock mechanism starts after one day grace period. Grace period lasts 24 hours and allows you to © Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
order a new license key. Otherwise, hard lock is triggered, and as a consequence new network elements integration is not possible. What is more configuration management functions, like upload and provisioning, do not work. To avoid hard lock activation you are notified with two other alarms, minor and major, with configurable threshold limits. It allows you to order a new license key before hard lock activation and with no harm to NetAct operability. The hard lock for capacity licenses is released and related alarm is cleared after installation of new valid license with additional capacity or after unintegration of element. NetAct hard lock for NetAct term licenses Hard lock for the NetAct term licenses concerns all the NetAct Sales Features which are protected with On/Off or Capacity licenses. For term licenses hard lock is triggered in case license key end date expires, which means if license validity period ends. Without a valid license key, the NetAct licensed function is blocked from usage or license capacity is deducted. NetAct Alarms The figure illustrates the NetAct alarms.
Figure 248: NetAct Alarms The NetAct alarms functionality is designed to inform you about closing the NetAct software license keys validity end date, as well as exceeding the NetAct software licenses capacity thresholds. Alarms are related to the NetAct hard lock protection function for the NetAct software licenses. The purpose of alarms function is to remind you about need of ordering new licenses, and to provide seamlessly NetAct system work. The NetAct alarms are divided into two groups: •
Alarms for NetAct capacity licenses The responsibility of exceeding capacity alarms belongs to the Software Asset Monitoring application. Software Asset Monitoring monitors and reports used capacity of software licenses and in case of capacity thresholds are crossed, respective alarm is raised and visible in the NetAct Monitor application.
•
Alarms for NetAct term licenses For alarming about NetAct software licenses which are about to expire, the License Manager is responsible. The License Manager handles validity dates of term licenses and in case of validity time comes to the end, user is informed with several levels of alarms which are shown in the NetAct Monitor application.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
391
392
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Licenses for OEM software The figure illustrates the OEM SW licenses:
Figure 249: OEM SW licenses Software Asset Monitoring The new License Management Model in NetAct is split in two areas: The traditional management of license keys with the License Management Application. The Monitoring of the usage of features for invoicing accordingly as an alternative for the payment of a fixed license. NetAct License Manager provides centralized solution for managing network element licenses. However, in NetAct the functionality of License Manager has been extended as well to manage NetAct applications licenses. All license key management operations can be performed using License Manager. Software Asset Monitoring application collects and processes the configuration and measurement data based on customer specific settings. It generates a report on the feature usage and forwards the formatted monitoring data to the customer and Nokia Customer Team via an encrypted e-mail. The encrypted e-mail can be read and validated by Customer and Nokia Customer Team only. The report on the feature usage is used to generate an invoice. One software monitoring report comprises information related to one NetAct cluster. Software Asset Monitoring enables speed and efficiency with fast software activations through bypassing the pre-activation procurement process, and applying alternative pricing models where invoicing is based on network configuration or on used functionality. This results in OPEX savings and in an increased flexibility. Monitoring data is Configuration Management (CM) parameters and Performance Management (PM) counters. Software Asset Monitoring application stores the data for further handling such as pre-processing to make raw monitoring data is more accurate and usable, for example, data size is reduced and data are presented in more convenient way to the user. Local storing of data is needed before and after data processing. A report is periodically generated based on monitoring data and sent to Nokia side where later on it is used for invoicing purposes. The Monitoring modules are product specific elements, which allow an incorporation of specific reporting methods. Monitoring modules are divided into two groups: PM and CM, particular for each network technology.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Figure 250: Monitoring as the alternative for license key management Centralized License Server Software Asset Monitoring introduces support for monitoring-based license management as the Software Entitlement Manager (SWEM). Monitoring-based license management is part of a new license protection concept for network-level licensing.
Figure 251: Centralized License Server
Monitoring based license management is applicable for LTE and Single RAN technology. Monitoring based license management is a mechanism that enables automatic monitoring of licensed feature usage and license management on the network. The new mechanism involves SWEM that monitors features usage and interworks with Centralized License Server to manage licenses on the network. In NetAct, a new license protection concept is introduced for network-level licensing. Centralized License Server (CLS) is an application that enables centralized, semiautomatic license management in the whole network. License management takes place from one central place, CLS, for many NetAct Regional Clusters. CLS reserves and releases capacity for a specific feature based on a network element
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
393
394
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
request sent by Software Entitlement Manager (SWEM) and without manual work. Such behavior ensures that licensing smoothly follows changes in network management.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
License Manager to check licenses License Management Overview
Figure 252: Managing License Keys Overview Licenses are used to enable new features or functionality. For example, you may need new licenses when you want to upgrade software or hardware, activate new services, add capacity or optimize or expand the network. Licenses are ordered from Nokia as any other functionality. You must then distribute the license to the network elements in order to make the feature or functionality available in the network. License A license is an agreement from the owner of a product that gives permission to use or produce the product according to the agreed conditions. The information that enables the use of licensed software is called a license key. Nokia implements license keys as Nokia-specific license files. Each license file gives the permission to use one or several features or functionalities in the specified network elements. A license file contains the information to which network element the license is targeted. This is done by using each network element's unique identifier which is called a target identifier. There are two types of licenses: •
On/Off license
•
Capacity licenses
NE licenses are installed to network elements either using the License Manager application or element managers. License Manager The License Manager is a web-based application, which is a centralized solution for managing license files.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
395
396
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 253: License Manager The graphical user interface can be used to perform the following operations:
Figure 254: License Manager Features (1/2) The following figure illustrates the license features:
Figure 255: License Manager Features (2/2)
You need to have special permission to perform operations using License Manager. Licensing Concepts: NE Licensing Network element license management allows you to control the network element feature licenses from a centralized location, taking into account the number of network elements in the network and variety of licensed features within one network element. The NE licenses are issued for specific target ID. The network elements to which you will use the license should be known in advance. Once the license is issued for the specific target, it is not valid for other ones. NE licenses are installed to network elements using either the License Manager application or element managers.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Network elements license concept is supported for AXC, BSC, CDS, FLEXINS, HLR, MGW, MSC, RNC, SGSN, WBTS network elements. The following figure below illustrates the network element license concept:
Figure 256: Licensing Concepts: NE Licensing
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
397
398
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Licensing Concepts: Pool License Pool licenses contain license information for a large number of network elements of the same type. They are used for AXCs, WCDMA BTSs, and Flexi Direct BTSs. Pool licenses are specific to one NetAct cluster and they contain the NetAct Target ID of the NetAct cluster to which the pool license file is designated. They also contain the size of the pool, which is interpreted differently for on/off licenses and capacity licenses. •
For on/off licenses The size of the pool defines the number of network elements, which are permitted to use the functionality. This means that you can create licenses for that number of network elements.
•
For capacity licenses The size of the pool represents the total amount of capacity, which can be divided between the network elements. This means that you can generate licenses with different amounts of capacity for several network elements as long as there is capacity left in the pool.
In order to take the license into use in the network elements, a license file needs to be generated for the network elements from the pool license. The generated file is called an NMS generated license file and it contains the target identifiers of the network elements. Generating a license from the pool license decreases the amount of free capacity in the pool. The figure illustrates the pool license concept.
Figure 257: Licensing Concepts: License Pools
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Licensing Concepts: License Sets License sets functionality allows dividing pool licenses into groups and then assigning them, by means of license set, to chosen Maintenance Region (MR). This concept is useful for managing licenses in more effective way and gives flexibility of managing pool license consumption. License set is an advanced configuration, which enables turning features on/off during automated license distribution by allocating pool licenses to be consumed by network elements running in dedicated maintenance regions. When a license belongs to a license set which is assigned to some maintenance region, it can be used in automatic license distribution only if requested network element also belongs to this maintenance region. In other words, network elements can only request licenses assigned to the same maintenance region. When network element sends a request to generate a license for some feature, License Manager check which maintenance region this NE belongs to, and only uses licenses from the pool assigned to that maintenance region. A license cannot be assigned twice, if license is assigned to one license set, it cannot be used again.
Figure 258: Licensing Concepts: License Sets
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
399
400
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
License States The section covers license states as follows: •
Network Elements and OSS Generated Licenses (NMS licenses)
•
Pool and SW Licenses
Table 15: Network Elements and OSS Generated Licenses (NMS licenses) License States
Description
Distributed
The license is distributed to its network element.
Not Distributed
The license file has not been distributed to the network element which is in the target identifier list of license file.
Deleted
The license file which was previously distributed to its network element, has been removed from this network element.
Expired
The license validity period has ended or the license signature certificate has expired.
Expired still in NE
The license file has been distributed to the network element, but the validity period of license has ended or the license signature certificate has expired.
Not Integrated
The network element is not integrated to NetAct anymore.
Conflicting
The license file in the NetAct repository, and the license file in the NE have different content. For NE licenses the correct license version should be identified. In case the correct version is present in the NE, it should be reimported to NetAct. For NMS licenses, the license should be deleted from the NE. In case the capacity is needed on the NE, new capacity should be distributed from valid pool license.
Invalid
The license file exists in the network element, but it is not used by the network element because the network element does not accept it or xml file has been corrupted.
Table 16: Pool and SW Licenses License State
Description
Valid
The license file has been accepted by the License Manager application, which means the license xml file and signature are correct.
Expired
The license validity period has ended or the license signature certificate has expired.
Invalid
The xml file has been corrupted or the license file has signature, signed with a test certificate, which is not accepted.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Figure 259: NetAct Licenses The following figure illustrates the network elements licenses.
Figure 260: Network Elements Licenses
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
401
402
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
License Management Tasks License management tasks are covered in the following sections: •
License Import
•
Viewing Licenses
•
Uploading Licenses
•
Exporting Licenses
•
Distributing Licenses
•
Feature Templates
•
Network Element Audit against Feature Template
•
License Pool Substitution
•
Licenses Reports
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
License Import Context Import operation view of the License Manager Web UI makes it possible to introduce a license into the management system in a very easy way. Imported licenses can be totally new, or new versions of already existing licenses in the NetAct. Individual licenses or .zip archives of multiple licenses can be imported from any available folder.
Figure 261: License Import Perform the following steps to import licenses to NetAct:
Figure 262: Procedure: License Import Procedure 1
In the main menu click License and select Import License from the drop-down menu.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
403
404
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
Click the Upload button and browse the folder where the license files are stored. Information The License files table is refreshed and shows uploaded licenses. If any license is already imported, it contains information about date of previous import in Last imported column and label, if it was assigned before to this license. If the uploaded license expired or is faulty, it does not contain check box and cannot be imported. Status column in the table provides detailed information about license failure. To remove licenses from the table click the Clear button. You can upload license file in the XML format or you can upload multiple, archived licenses in the following formats: zip, tgz, tar.gz. You can check the detailed information about the license by clicking on the license file name.
Result of this step The upload operation starts and progress bar appears. 3
Perform the following steps for attaching a label to the license file. a) To create a new label and attach it to a license(s), check the license(s), click the Labels button and select Create new. Type or paste new label into text field and click OK. b) To assign existing label to the license file, check the license(s), click the Labels button and select an appropriate label from the list. c) To remove label from the license, click the Labels button and select Remove current from the list. Information You can attach the label to the uploaded license files for an easier identification. You must create a label, before it is attached to the license file.
4
Select licenses you want to import and click the Import button. Information If you do not have LIC_ImportPermission, Import button is disabled. To see the import operation details, follow the link into notification. The Recent Operations view appears with the latest operation highlighted. In the table below there are listed certain tasks of selected request. Successfully imported licenses are available in the License Key Browser view.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Viewing Licenses Context You can browse all types of licenses using the License Key Browser view. You can also download NE licenses to network elements and distribute pool licenses.
Figure 263: Viewing Imported Licenses and Licenses details Perform the following steps for viewing licenses:
Figure 264: Procedure: Viewing Licenses Procedure 1
In the main menu click License and select License Key Browser from the drop-down menu. Information You can choose a type of displayed licenses by selecting appropriate tab in the License Key Browser view. If you highlight a license by clicking on it, second table appears below with information about the license target. You can also click license file name to get the detailed information about the license.
Result of this step License Key Browser view appears.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
405
406
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
You can filter licenses displayed in the table. To filter licenses, click the button. Information In order to browse the installed license easier, you can filter out the irrelevant entries. Filter settings are memorized for each tab. Licenses in the following views: NetAct Software Licenses, NE Licenses, Pool Licenses are filtered by license type and this criterion cannot be removed from the filtering criteria. You can filter which licenses are shown, according to the following criteria: Target type, Feature Code, Feature Name, Label, License code, License name, License file, Serial number, Target ID. a) Select a criterion from Filter by: drop-down menu. You can select multiple criteria by clicking the Add criterion icon. To remove filtering criterion, click the Remove criterion icon. Information You can merge the filtering criteria using (OR) and (AND) operators. Operator (OR) means that in the License keys table all licenses are shown which fulfill first or second criterion. If you select (AND) operator, in the License keys table only, the licenses which fulfill both criteria will be shown. b) You can define by checking the check boxes, if expired licenses and downloaded to their all or filtered targets licenses in case of NE licenses, or empty pool (capacity equals zero) in case of pool licenses, are shown in the License Keys table. c) Click the OK button to filter licenses in the License keys table according to the selected criteria. Result of this step The License keys table displays licenses according to selected criteria, which are listed above the table. Information
To clear filtering criteria, click the
button.
If you checked an expired or empty pool (remaining capacity equals zero) check boxes, Clear filter button does not clear this choice. If you want to uncheck them, you must do it manually. To refresh the License keys view, click the
button.
You can check the license detailed information by clicking the license file name.
Result of this step
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
The Filter dialog appears. Edit the label of the license files You can remove the existing license label or change it. You can also add a new one if the label does not exist. NMS generated licenses have the same label as the pool license, it was generated from. To add a label, check the license(s) and click the Labels button. Then select Create new button and type or paste new label into a text field and click OK. To assign an existing label to the license file, check the license(s), click the Labels button and select appropriate label from the list. To remove label from the license, click the Labels button and select Remove current. Exporting License Files You can also export license files to the local workstation by clicking the Export button.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
407
408
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Uploading Licenses The purpose of upload license status operation is to synchronize the latest license and feature information from the network elements with the NetAct database and to keep License Manager up-to-date. Synchronization is performed by uploading the status of all licenses from the selected network elements. In case there are licenses on network elements which are not present in the NetAct database, they are uploaded and added to the NetAct database. You can schedule license information synchronization for desired network elements of particular type.
Figure 265: Uploading Licenses
Figure 266: Upload Licenses Scheduling
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Exporting Licenses Exporting license is an operation which allows you to download license file to your local drive. You can download one license as a .xml file or multiple licenses as a .zip archive.
Figure 267: Export Licenses
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
409
410
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Distributing Licenses Distributing license files entails downloading the selected licenses to the designated network elements. The features can then be taken into use according to the feature activation instructions. There are following distribution options: •
NE license distribution is used to distribute NE licenses, and to redistribute NMS generated licenses.
•
Pool license distribution is used to create and distribute NMS generated licenses.
Distributing NE licenses NE license distribution involves downloading licenses to network elements in one or multiple operation. NetAct users can download an NE license, or an NMS generated license to all integrated network elements mentioned in the license file as a single operation. Download can be executed in several operations so that only some of the network elements are selected at a time. If new targets have been added to the license, the download operation is needed only for the added target network elements.
Figure 268: License Distribution: Distributing NE licenses Distributing Licenses from a Pool Distributing licenses from a pool functionality enables multiple pool license distribution to multiple network elements in one operation. When a license from a pool is distributed, network element specific licenses (NMS generated licenses) are created by the License Manager application. NMS generated licenses are then automatically distributed to the network elements. During capacity feature distribution, the user defines the amount of capacity for each element.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Figure 269: License Distribution: Distributing Pool licenses 1/2
Figure 270: License Distribution: Distributing Pool licenses 2/2 Distributing Licenses Using Guided Distribution Guided distribution allows you to distribute multiple licenses, based on a feature template, to one or multiple network elements. During guided distribution operation, license situation on network element is compared to the one in the feature template and capacity needed for distribution is calculated and then sent to the network element. Needed capacity is summarized from remaining capacity of different pools. This functionality assures that network elements will reach feature template definition.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
411
412
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 271: License Distribution: Guided Distribution Automatic Licenses Distribution Automatic license distribution functionality allows to distribute licenses to network elements without manual operations and based on a certain configuration. Mechanism of automatic license distribution provides that licenses automatically follow network configuration. Automatic license distribution is based on network element request. NE request is sent to a NetAct system in case network element needs new license or capacity. The needed licenses are generated out of available pool and sent to the network element automatically. For capacity licenses available pool is summarized from remaining capacity of different pools. Deleted licenses can also be concerned as the available pool and distributed automatically, provided that proper configuration for automatic license distribution is set. Available pool can be defined by license sets functionality. During automatic license distribution you can limit a pool of licenses which can be distributed, by assigning license set to desired maintenance region.
Figure 272: License Distribution: Automatic license key distribution 1/2
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Figure 273: License Distribution: Automatic license key distribution 2/2
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
413
414
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Feature Templates Creating feature templates are the operations which allow you to define a set of features and their capacity desired on a network element. Feature templates concepts are used in guided distribution operation and during auditing network elements. A template can be defined based on existing network element and as a custom template by selecting features from these available in a pool licenses. If you generate a template from an existing network element, only the distributed licenses are taken into consideration. All features and their capacity values, which are distributed to a network element, are going to be included in the template. If multiple licenses per feature exist in the network element, they will be represented in the template as a single entry for the feature with capacity value which is equal to the sum of all licenses for the feature. By defining a label in a template, you can narrow down the pool licenses which will be used in the guided distribution.
Figure 274: Feature Templates 1/2 The following figure illustrates the feature template.
Figure 275: Feature Templates 2/2 © Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Network Element Audit against Feature Template License Manager offers the possibility to audit network elements against previously defined feature templates. This functionality compares the licensed features status of the network element with the one defined in a feature template and check if the network elements have sufficient licenses distributed. This option allows user to see if network element status is insufficient, equal or exceeding against to the feature template and to start guided distribution to all network elements having too less licenses.
Figure 276: Network Element Audit against Feature Template
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
415
416
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
License Pool Substitution The pool license substitute process allows you to replace a pool license in case you selected a wrong target in pool license distribution or in case of broken hardware. License pool substitution process consist of three phases, registering licenses for pool substitution, exporting license pool substitution request, and importing license pool substitute permission. If you have selected a wrong target in pool license distribution, the only way to revert the allocation is by applying the pool license substitute process. The incorrect license capacity is released back to the pool. By default, the substitution process delete the substituted licenses from the network element.
Figure 277: License Pool Substitution
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Licenses Reports You can generate the following reports via the license Manager graphical user interface: •
Report on NetAct software features
•
Report on operations history
•
Report on license files of network elements
•
Report on license substitutions
•
Report on network element license files of given state
•
Report on licensed features of network elements
•
Report on remaining capacity in pool licenses
•
Report on comparison of templates to network element
•
Report on comparison of templates to network element on feature level
•
Report on NetAct software features
The following information is available in this report: Area, Feature name, Feature code, Feature description, Sales item, Network Technology, License state, Capacity, Expiration date. For all reports you can generate via graphical user interface, data export to a CSV files is available.
Figure 278: License Reports The following figure illustrates the feature reports.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
417
418
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 279: Feature Reports
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Viewing Recent Operations Recent operation functionality shows history of operations performed in the License Manager application and provides an overview of all operations performed by the user, system or network element. You are able to see detailed information about recently executed operations, ongoing or finished, with their status of completion. The overview of the following operations are available: •
Delete from network
•
Download
•
Feature state change
•
Guided distribution
•
Import
•
License generation request
•
License state change
•
Pool distribution
•
Substitution
•
Synchronization request
•
Target Id verification
•
Terminate
•
Upload status
Figure 280: Viewing Recent Operations
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
419
420
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Software Asset Monitoring Introduction to Software Asset Monitoring
Figure 281: Software Asset Monitoring The Software Asset Monitoring application collects and processes the configuration and measurement data based on customer specific settings. It generates a report on the feature usage and forwards the formatted monitoring data to the customer and Nokia Customer Team via an encrypted e-mail. The encrypted e-mail can be read and validated by Customer and Nokia Customer Team only. The report on the feature usage is used to generate an invoice. One software monitoring report comprises information related to one NetAct cluster. For LTE and Flexi Direct, software monitoring is the only way of usage control as License Keys are not implemented for these technologies. Monitoring data are configuration management (CM) parameters and Performance Management (PM) counters. The Software Asset Monitoring application stores the data for further handling, to make raw monitoring data more accurate and usable. A report is periodically generated based on monitoring data and sent to Nokia, where later on it is used for invoicing purposes. Monitoring modules are product specific elements, which allow an incorporation of specific reporting methods. Monitoring modules are divided into two groups, PM and CM, particular for each network technology. The following monitoring modules are currently available:
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Table 17: Monitoring Module Types (1/3) Monitoring Module
Description
GSM CM
Monitors GSM configuration management parameters.
IMS CM
Monitors IMS configuration management parameters.
LTE FDD CM
Monitors LTE FDD configuration management parameters.
LTE TDD CM
Monitors LTE TDD configuration management parameters.
LTE FZ CM
Monitors LTE Flexi Zone Micro configuration management parameters.
LTE FZC CM
Monitors LTE Flexi Zone Controller configuration management parameters.
NetAct Radio
Monitors NetAct Standard SW configuration management parameters.
NT HLR FE CM
Monitors NT HLR FE configuration management parameters.
RACS CM
Monitors configuration management parameters from the Radio Applications Cloud Servers.
The NetAct Radio monitoring module is a default, permanent module which is not configurable. Table 18: Monitoring Module Types (2/3) Monitoring Module
Description
SRAN CM
Monitors Single RAN configuration management parameters.
WCDMA CM
Monitors WCDMA configuration management parameters.
Flexi NG PM
Monitors Flexi NG counters.
Flexi NS PM
Monitors Flexi NS counters.
GSM PM
Monitors Flexi GSM counters.
IMS PM
Monitors Flexi IMS counters.
LTE FDD PM
Monitors LTE FDD counters.
LTE TDD PM
Monitors LTE TDD counters.
LTE FZ PM
Monitors LTE Flexi Zone Micro counters.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
421
422
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Table 19: Monitoring Module Types (3/3) Monitoring Module
Description
LTE FZC PM
Monitors LTE Flexi Zone Controller counters.
NT HLR FE PM
Monitors NT HLR counters.
One-EIR PM
Monitors One-EIR counters.
One-MNP PM
Monitors One-MNP counters.
One- NDS PM
Monitors One-NDS counters.
One TAS PM
Monitors One TAS counters.
WCDMA PM
Monitors WCDMA counters.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Software Asset Monitoring Notifications Software Asset Monitoring supports e-mail notifications and provides information for users about generating reports, as well as warns users about misusing application and crossing capacity thresholds for features. E-mail notifications are sent right after report generation in case one of the following events occurs: •
Summary report (monthly or quarterly) has been generated.
•
Unauthorized modifications have been made to monitoring data or in formerly generated report.
•
Feature threshold value, set during module creation, has been exceeded.
Notifications are configurable globally, as well as for particular feature during module creation. Software Asset Monitoring supports also alarms for NetAct software capacity licenses related to NetAct hard lock protection for capacity licenses.
Figure 282: Notifications
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
423
424
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Software Asset Monitoring Reports The purpose of Software Asset Monitoring is to monitor and report features usage. As a result of this a monitoring report is created. Software Asset Monitoring application allows to view reports, download reports as CSV or XML file, and backup a report in form of raw monitoring data. Software Asset Monitoring application creates following types of reports for CM and PM based monitoring: •
Daily report It contains information about daily change of features/counters usage. In case of CM based monitoring it contains feature parameters collected and reported once a day. In case of PM based monitoring it contains information on counters which have been collected during a day and counters values are reported for every hour.
•
Periodic detailed report It contains information on features/counters usage for each day of the whole invoicing period. In case of CM based monitoring it assembles features/counters daily values. In case of PM based monitoring it shows results with aggregation approach applied. Reporting results are listed for each network element.
•
Periodic aggregated report Periodic aggregated report shows aggregated features/counters values for the invoicing period by applying the logic as defined by SWAM parameters. Results are listed for each network element.
•
Summary report Summary report contains summary values for each feature/counter that is applied for invoicing during the invoicing period for the dedicated NetAct Cluster. In summary reports every Sales Item is listed only once as a basis for invoicing.
Figure 283: Monitoring Reports The following tables show the rows and the columns which can be visible in every Software Asset Monitoring report.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
Table 20: Monitoring Reports Content 1/3 Row Name
Description
Module name
Module name which is the same module name that is created during module creation.
Module type
Represents technology for which report was created and indicates what type of report it is, CM (configuration management) or PM (performance management), for example: LTE FDD CM, WCDMA PM.
Day/Period
It shows for what time report was created. In case of daily reports there is a Day row, which shows the exact day for which report was created. In case of periodic reports there is a Period row, which shows the period of time for which report was created.
Comment
Table 21: Monitoring Reports Content 2/3 Row Name
Description
Aggregation
This row informs about type of aggregation which has been used to create a report. Available options are Off, NetAct Cluster, RNC, BSC, Site.
Pricing model
Type of pricing model which has been used to create a report.
For CM reports
Nth highest value
Number of Nth highest value used for calculation.
For Periodic detailed report
Sum up Channel Elements uplink/downlink
It shows the way in which Channel Elements uplink and downlink values have been counted.
For WCDMA PM Daily report
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Comment
425
426
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Table 22: Monitoring Reports Content 3/3 Row Name
Description
Comment
Processing Sets
It shows method of calculating processing sets. Available options are: Off, On, Incremental capacity units.
For WCDMA PM reports
HSxPA Processing Sets trigger
Shows unit taken into account when For WCDMA PM reports calculating processing sets. Available using Processing Sets options are User and User and Mbps.
Processing Set It shows if only processing set 2 is 2 only used.
For WCDMA PM reports in case of Processing Sets = On
Processing Set It shows the weight of processing set For WCDMA PM reports 3 weight factor 3 compare to processing set 2. in case of Processing Set 2 only = No TargetId
Identification number of NetAct.
Customer names
Shows the customer name
Excluded days
Shows periods excluded from monitoring scope.
Signature
Hash value used for checking the data integrity.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
LTE and SRAN Licenses LTE and SRAN License Management The following figure illustrates the LTE and SRAN License Management.
Figure 284: LTE and SRAN License Management Introduction to license management in LTE and Single RAN From NetAct 16.2 onwards, Nokia introduces a new software (SW) license management, which is an evolution of the mechanism currently existing in WCDMA RAN. After a customer’s order, SW License Keys can be retrieved by Nokia Central Licensing System (CLicS), which generates SW License Keys (LKs). The LKs have to be uploaded to the Centralized SW License Server (CLS). The LKs are assigned automatically to the SBTSs/LTE eNB’s according to the usage of SW LK protected Sales Items. The LKs are not physically downloaded to the SBTSs and LTE eNB’s. They are kept in the CLS from where NetAct SW Entitlement Manager (SWEM) assigned Right To Use (RTU) to the particular NE’s. There is one CLS per the whole operator’s network. The CLS cooperates with SW Entitlement Managers (SWEMs) in NetAct Regional Clusters (NetAct RCs). Pool licenses in license management Pool licenses are used for SBTS’s and eNB’s. All pool licenses are stored in the CLS. They are available to all NetAct RCs of the operator’s network. Pool licenses specify the size of the pool. The size is interpreted in two different ways: •
On/Off licenses For the On/Off licenses, the size of the pool defines the number of entities, for example network elements that are permitted to use the functionality. This means that you can create licenses for a particular number of entities.
•
Capacity licenses For the capacity licenses, the size of the pool represents the total amount of capacity that can be divided among network elements in the operator’s network. This means that the CLS can grant or deny Right-To-Use (RTU) of required capacity available in the pool.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
427
428
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Components of the Single RAN SW License Management Nokia introduces the physical software License Keys (SW LKs) concept for the SBTSes in Single RAN. In the operator’s network there is one network-wide pool within a single CLS. The pools of licenses are not split into the NetAct RCs as it was implemented for WCDMA BTSes. The components of the Single RAN SW License Management and their roles:
Figure 285: Single RAN SW License Management components •
Central Licensing System (CLicS) The ClicS is an application and interface for creating and delivering SW license keys that Nokia generates based on the customer’s order.
•
Centralized License Server (CLS) The CLS is an application that provides a central control point for granting or denying right-to-use (RTU) to Nokia software. There is one CLS per a whole customer’s network. All NetAct Clusters are connected to the CLS.
•
NetAct Regional Cluster (NetAct RC) The NetAct RC is a framework that offers a versatile network and a mobile service management solution. In Single RAN each NetAct RC runs its own SW Entitlement Manager (SWEM).
•
Software Entitlement Manager (SWEM) The SWEM, as a component of existing SWAM, is a software component located in a NetAct RC. It continuously checks configuration data and counter information provided by the NetAct RC for relevant Sales Items (SIs). The SWEM verifies the activation and the capacity of Standard, High-value, and Hardware (STD/HVF/HWA) features. The SWEM cooperates with the CLS to verify if sufficient SW license capacity exists. The SW license keys are not physically installed at the eNB. They are booked in the CLS and SWEM as an RTU. In case of missing SW license capacity, the SWEM generates a limitation command to the related SBTS.
•
Software Asset Monitoring (SWAM) For the customer purposes, the SWAM is a process of monitoring the performance management, charging statistics, and configuration management data that is related to software assets in the customer network. The SWEM and the SWAM are using the same calculation methods for checking license usage. The monitoring happens in the customer network, but it is controlled and invoiced by Nokia according to the customer contract.
Migration from WBTS to SBTS The migration from a WCDMA BTS (WBTS) to an Single RAN BTS (SBTS) is a simple process. The license capacity, as required for SBTSs, needs to be ordered and loaded to the pool. After startup, according to the configuration and usage, the
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
License management in NetAct
software license keys (SW LKs) provide capacity which is automatically allocated from the pool. The pool capacity is reduced respectively. After the upgrade, the SW LKs become ineffective as they already exist in the WBTS. They do not block or harm anything. After the migration, these SW LKs can be removed without any impact on NEs. For the new SBTS, the SW LKs are in the CLS, whilst in the WBTS the SW LKs are physically installed on the NEs. As the approaches differ in the WBTS and the SBTS, no direct migration is possible.
Figure 286: Before migrating WBTS to SBTS The following figure illustrates the after startup of the BTS:
Figure 287: After startup of BTS Planning and Ordering The principles of planning required pool licenses are as follows: •
The SBTS HW needs to be defined for an initial rollout or for a capacity upgrade.
•
The SW functionality needs to be defined and parametrized.
The process of ordering required licenses is as follows: 1. Network planning identifies the need for a capacity upgrade to guarantee a certain service. 2. The amount of required capacity is identified. 3. A purchase order for licenses with the required capacities is issued. 4. Nokia delivers the licenses taking respective lead times into account. 5. The licenses are imported to the network's CLS. 6. The operations department performs the license distributions according to specified processes.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
429
430
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Summary: License management in NetAct Module Summary This module covered the following learning objectives: •
Describe NetAct Licensing concepts.
•
Describe NetAct Software Asset Protection.
•
Use License Manager to check licenses.
•
Use Software Asset monitoring.
•
Describe LTE and SRAN Licenses.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
Software Management Module Objectives • Use Software Manager for network element software synchronization, reporting and import. • Perform backup tasks for the supported network elements.
Software Management Software Management in NetAct Configuration changes are constantly needed to evolving networks to secure, maintain, or improve the service level perceived by the end users. With the introduction of new services, networks are enhanced to meet high demands of new generation consumers. The configuration changes to complex and large networks must be well planned, documented, controlled, approved, and executed to avoid unplanned conflicts and symptoms in the network, which might cause service level degradation. Software management play a central role in configuration changes and in the change control process. Change requests including software updates in the network can originate from various sources, such as: •
Faults in current software, which need to be fixed
•
Changes in other elements, which creates a need for compatibility changes in interfacing elements
•
Introduction of new services, and enhancements to existing ones
•
Hardware changes in elements (for example, capacity increase)
•
Security patches
•
End of life of products, causing software replacements
Figure 288: Centralized software management 1/2 The following describes the main functionalities and benefits of centralized software management.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
431
432
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 289: Centralized Software Management 2/2
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
Software Manager Software Manager allows remote management of software configurations in network elements. It allows the user to upload the software configuration information from NE to Nokia NetAct, download the NE software from NetAct to NE, import NE SW, and activate the NE SW. Users can easily search and examine software configuration data from a remote location. The system saves the software configuration information in the NetAct database, which can regularly be updated. An important feature of this application is also that the NEs' software can be stored to the NetAct disk and be downloaded to the managed objects from a remote location. All executed and ongoing tasks can be reviewed in the status view. With Software Manager Functionalities, the users can: •
View the task and corresponding NE details
•
Network Element information
•
Latest task information
•
Software tree
•
Software details
•
Upload software configuration information from NE to NetAct
•
Download NE software from NetAct to NE
•
Activate NE software in network element
•
Compare network elements’ software versions
•
Schedule tasks and manage schedules
•
Manage SW packages in centralized Software Archive
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
433
434
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 290: Functionality in NetAct
Figure 291: Software Manager Tasks
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
Software Manager Operations The Software Manager user interface consists of following views:
Figure 292: Operations Network Status: Software Network Software Status provides a centralized software configuration register for the network element software of the managed network. Network Operations The Tasks view is intended for monitoring the status of the software management tasks. The status of the individual operations can be seen in the Tasks main view. The Details tab includes more detailed information of each operation. Software Archive Software Archive provides a centralized network element software storage for network element releases and NetAct change deliveries. After the software is imported, the software is stored in the NetAct disks in one directory specific per network element type. The following sections are covered in the next topics: •
Software Manager Graphical User Interface
•
Network Software Status
•
Viewing Details of a Managed Object
•
Uploading software configuration information from NE to NetAct
•
Network Operations- Tasks
•
Software Archive
•
Attaching / Viewing Software Package
•
Viewing Compatible Managed Objects
•
Changing status of software package in Software Archive
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
435
436
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Software Manager Graphical User Interface The following figure illustrates the graphical user interface operations:
Figure 293: Operations: Graphical User Interface
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
Network Software Status Network Software Status implements a centralized, up-to-date software configuration status for the network element software of the managed network. Network Software Status is especially useful in troubleshooting cases and when planning software installations. This is because there is no longer need to use remote MML commands for viewing the software configuration, nor to record the existing software manually on spreadsheet documents. Network Software Status provides the following functionalities: •
View the software status Certain network element type in the whole network.
•
View the software configuration of a network element Software builds, change deliveries, change notes, and files are listed.
•
Upload software configuration from network element(s) You can schedule an upload from network element(s) to the Software Manager at any time. It is also possible to define repeatable tasks (daily, weekly, monthly). Upload status can be monitored in Tasks tab.
•
Download software to network elements You can schedule software download so that the system automatically downloads software to the network elements as required. Download status can be monitored in Tasks tab.
•
Activate certain network elements When you download software to network elements, you can set the software to be automatically activated after the download. This is supported for MGW network elements. You can schedule the activation of downloaded network element as required. Activation status can be monitored in Tasks tab.
•
Compare SW status for selected NEs You can compare currently installed software for MSS and MGW (only) by selecting the network elements and pressing Compare SW button. You can also use filtering to see in which network elements a particular CD set is installed.
•
Search network elements You can have a list of the network elements which fulfill the search criteria. Search can be run based on any saved database information.
•
Managing own sets You can create own sets of network elements, export from and import into Software Manager. Import/Export functionality allows you to use other tools (for example Excel) to manage a list of network elements to be downloaded, activated, or uploaded via Software Manager.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
437
438
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Figure 294: Operations: Viewing Network Software Status
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
Viewing Details of a Managed Object Context This section allows viewing detailed information such as software version information or tasking related information of the selected network element. Peform the following steps for viewing details of a managed object:
Figure 295: Procedure: Viewing Details of a Managed Object Procedure 1
Select the Network Status view.
2
Select the Software tab.
3
Select Parent from View drop-down list. Information You can also choose Maintenance region option, to view the network divided into maintenance regions.
4
Select managed object type from MO type list.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
439
440
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
5
Select parent managed object from the list located on the left side of the window. Information If the Maintenance region option was chosen from View drop-down list, then select a maintenance region in this step.
6
Click
(the Show NE Details icon) located on the left of NE name.
Result of this step The details window appears. Additional Information You can view detailed information such as Managed Object information, Latest task information and Software details.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
Uploading software configuration information from NE to NetAct Context This section describes how to upload the software configuration information from network elements to NetAct (synchronize NE with NetAct). Before downloading and activating new software in any network element it is necessary to know the previous configuration or software version information. If a task is in the Ongoing state on a particular network element, then you cannot create a new task on the same network element to be run immediately. If you try to create such a task, then an error message is displayed.
Figure 296: Operations: Uploading SW Configuration Perform the following steps to upload the software configuration:
Figure 297: Procedure: Uploading software configuration information from NE to NetAct Procedure 1
Select Software from the Network Status menu bar.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
441
442
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
2
Select Parent from View drop-down list. Information You can also choose Maintenance region option, to view the network divided into maintenance regions.
3
Select managed object type from the MO type list.
4
Select parent managed object from the list located on the left side of the window. Information If the Maintenance region option was chosen from View drop-down list, then select a maintenance region in this step.
5
Select the network element by clicking the check box placed at the extreme left in the Network Elements table.
6
Click New Task... button. Result of this step New Task wizard appears.
7
In step 1 of the wizard select Software Upload from Task Type drop-down list and click Next. Information You can also do the following: •
Fill in the Task name field. Default value is MO name.
•
Write a description of the task in Task description field.
Click the icon to display operation description and the default timeout.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
8
In step 2, decide when to start the task from the following information. Information •
If Frequency is set to Immediately, the task will be started when the wizard is completed.
•
If Frequency is set to Once, fill the Start date field.
•
If Frequency is set to Periodically, fill all fields to schedule the number of task executions.
•
Choose the method of starting tasks and click Next.
•
Parallel- tasks on selected network elements are started simultaneously.
•
Sequence- tasks on selected network elements are started sequentially.
Checking the Interrupt on failure check box causes canceling tasks by the system if the previous task in the sequence failed. If the Interrupt on failure check box is not checked, system retries running task on the network element on which the task could not be done at the first time because the other task was in the Ongoing state on that particular network element. Tasks in group- determines the number of tasks that can be started simultaneously. 9
In step 3 click Finish to create Software Upload task. Information In this step you can see the summary of the created task. You can also correct task data by clicking the Previous button or close the wizard without creating a new task by clicking the Cancel button. Result of this step After completing all the steps, a new Software Upload task is created.
Additional Information Steps from 6 to 9 can be substituted by pressing the Synchronize button that also causes that a new Software Upload task is created and can be seen from the Network Operations view’s Tasks tab. If there are more than 250 NEs selected for a task, they are not viewed by default. If you want to view them all, click the available link. In the main view in the Status column, a current status of the Software Upload (synchronization) operation is displayed. If you have failed status you can click the status to see further information on the failed uploads in the Status column. If you have completed the steps successfully, the Networks Elements are synchronized with NetAct.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
443
444
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Network Operations- Tasks Context For a selected NE type, you can view scheduled, ongoing and executed tasks.
Figure 298: Operations: Tasks Perform the following steps for viewing scheduled, ongoing and executed tasks.
Figure 299: Procedure: Network Operations- Tasks Procedure 1
Select the Network Operations view.
2
Select the Tasks tab.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
3
Select the NE type from the MO type drop-down list. Information All tasks for selected managed object type are displayed in a tasks table and automatically sorted descending by Start date.
4
Click on Started/Finished time box or (the calendar icon) to set the time range of displayed tasks. Result of this step The pop-up calendar appears, where you can select the date and enter the hour.
5
Submit changes by clicking the Apply button. Information You can sort the data in the table by the content in each column. Sorting in the following columns: MO DN, MO name, Finished, alternates the order of subtasks in the single group. Sorting in the following columns: Task Name, Task Type, Created on, Start date, Creator alternates task groups order.
Result of this step The list of tasks is updated accordingly to selected time range. You can view all the tasks for selected network element type and time range. 6
Click the icon to expand the task group onto single tasks.
7
Follow the link in the Status column to show the details of single task.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
445
446
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Software Archive The Software Archive tab allows managing software packages, which are already stored in Software Archive. You can examine the details of a single software package, see the list of managed objects compatible with the browsed software package and download the package to compatible network elements. For managed objects for which multi package management is defined, you can create a virtual package, which combine physical software packages stored in Software Archive into one virtual software. The operations available for Software Archive are: •
Import software to the archive For the selected MO type, the user can import software from a CD, from the workstation, or from NetAct directory into the software archive and store them in Software Archive. The import SW operation is executed with the SW Import Manager java application.
•
Browse and view archived software You can have a view of the software stored in the software archive.
•
Remove archived software You can remove software stored in the software archive.
•
Rename archived software You can rename software stored in the software archive.
•
Change Change the internal lifecycle of software build status.
•
Declare different statuses Declare different statuses for software builds according to operator-internal business process.
Additionally, the information about the Software Archive current disk space divided into disk usage and available free space is included in the upper right corner of the Software Archive tab.
Figure 300: Operations: Software Archive The following figure illustrates the software import manager operations:
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
Figure 301: Operations: SW archive - Import manager
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
447
448
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Attaching / Viewing Software Package Documentation Context In the Software Archive tab you can also attach additional documentation to the software packages, both for physical software packages and virtual ones. In particular, for network elements which require additional installation scripts for some operations, you can attach installation scripts to the regular software packages. Documentation can be attached only to software packages that are located in Software Manager repository, both for packages from Local repository and virtual packages.
Figure 302: Operations: View / Attach Software package release documentation Perform the following steps to attach documentation to the software packages.
Figure 303: Procedure: Attaching / Viewing Software Package Documentation Procedure 1
Select the Software Archive tab.
2
From the MO type drop-down list, select the managed object type or subtype.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
3
From the list located on the left side of the window, select a package name under a desired release folder. Result of this step The selected software package is highlighted with blue color. The software package information is populated in the Summary tab.
4
Click the Documentation tab.
5
Click the Attach... button. Result of this step The Attach Documentation to Software Package dialog opens.
6
In the Attach Documentation to Software Package dialog click the Attach file... button.
7
By using the file chooser, select the file you want to attach to the software package. Information The maximum file size for import to Software Manager is 25 MB.
8
Click the Open button. Information The selected file is attached to the Software Archive. In the Attach Documentation to Software Package dialog, you can see the progress message of the uploaded file.
9
Click the Close button. Information The selected file is added to the software package. In the Documentation table there is information about file size. In the Action column, there are two options available. If you add more than one file with the same name, the next files are visible in the Documentation table as _x.. Where, x- numbers {1,2,3,...} added after the file name depending on the attaching files with the same name order. Example, If you add three documentation.txt files they are visible in Documentation table in the following way: •
documentation.txt
•
documentation_1.txt
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
449
450
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Viewing Compatible Managed Objects Context The conditions listed below determine the software package compatibility: •
Software package is assigned to the same MO type/subtype and has at least one common release version.
•
Software package is assigned to the common Maintenance Region which is defined by Lifecycle status.
Figure 304: Operations: View Compatible network elements for SW package installation Perform the following steps to see the compatible managed objects.
Figure 305: Procedure: Viewing Compatible Managed Objects Prerequisites The prerequisite for searching database against the compatible managed object is the support of the Active Software operations, which require a software package as a parameter (for example Software Download, Software Provision).
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
Procedure 1
Select the Software Archive tab.
2
From the MO type drop-down list, select the managed object type or subtype.
3
From the navigation tree located on the left side of the window, select a package name under a desired release folder. Result of this step The selected software package is highlighted with blue color.
4
Click the Compatible Managed Objects tab to see a table listing managed objects that are compatible with the browsed software package. Information The list of compatible managed objects to the selected virtual package is generated based on the given virtual package properties (MO Type, Release, Lifecycle status). In that case, the target dependencies of physical software packages forming the given virtual package are not taken into account.
Result of this step All managed objects that can use the selected software package are listed in the network element table. Additional Information If, during the importing of a software package the managed object subtype was defined, in the Compatible Managed Objects frame you can see the network element table filtered by MO type and set MO subtype. If the selected MO type does not support the backup operations, the last column showing the backup information in the network element table becomes hidden.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
451
452
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Changing status of software package in Software Archive Context
Figure 306: Operations: Setting Software package Lifecycle Status support and software Quality Enforcement To change status of the software package in the Software Archive, execute the following steps:
Figure 307: Procedure: Changing status of software package in Software Archive Procedure 1
Select the Software Archive tab.
2
From the MO type drop-down list, select the managed object type or subtype.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
3
From the list located on the left side of the window, select a package name under a desired release folder by clicking a desired node. Result of this step The selected software package is highlighted with blue color. The software package information is populated in the Summary tab.
4
Click change status... link next to the Lifecycle status attribute in the Summary tab. Result of this step The Change lifecycle status dialog opens.
5
From drop-down list, select a desired lifecycle status.
6
Click OK. Information Click See history link to see the history of lifecycle status changes.You can see maximum 10 previous statuses in the list. Result of this step The Lifecycle status is updated in Summary tab.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
453
454
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Network Element Backup Network Elements Remote Backup from NetAct Taking a regular backup of the software and databases of the network elements ensures that you have a functional copy of the software which you can use if there are any problem with the software or hardware of the network element. This backup is called a fallback. How often you need to take a fallback depends on various factors. It is recommended to take a fallback before and after changes in the software or hardware of a network element. Make sure that the network element works with the new software or hardware before taking a fallback after the changes. The procedure of creating a fallback and storing and copying the fallback build of the network element data remotely from a NetAct Server comprises three main phases: 1. Controlling a fallback of the network software build Take an automatic fallback of the network element software build. The fallback build is saved on a disk in the network element. The fallback build may comprise all files (full fallback), data files (data fallback), or only the changed files (archive fallback). 2. Copying a fallback build into a network element local media There are two options available for copying a fallback build into a local media: •
You can copy the fallback build from the disk of the network element onto a DDS tape in the network element.
•
You can copy the fallback build from the disk of the network element onto a magnetic optical disk (MOD) in the network element.
3. Copying a fallback build into the fallback archive in NetAct You can copy the fallback build from the disk in the network element to a disk in NetAct (fallback archive) using FTP.
Figure 308: NE Backup Support
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
Network Elements Backup Archive Software Manager supports Flexi Platform based Network Elements (OMS, mcRNC, FlexiNG) data file backup from NE to NetAct. Data files are stored in a global disk in NetAct. The size of one file may exceed 2 GB, so the global disk space can be easily consumed after several rounds of backup operations. It is recommended to estimate the needed space for NE backups in order to have at least 30% of the global disk free. Filling up the global disk to its maximum can endanger the correct operations of the whole NetAct system. In order to prevent disturbances in normal operation of NetAct, it is possible to link the default backup repository to different storage location. The default solution is to add a shared storage for NetAct Software Manager application and link it as a default backup storage folder. It is recommended to perform this operation by NSN Technical Support. The Network Elements Backup Archive view displays all existing backups of the selected network element. The created backups are stored on the network element's disks and additionally can be sent to an external device or to NetAct. With the Storage type filter can be used to display data in a desired manner. If the backup is stored in NetAct you can also find the URL Images, from where the NetAct user can download the backup files. In the upper right corner of this tab you can find the information about the Backup Archive current disk space divided into disk usage and available free space.
Figure 309: Network Elements Backup Archive Creating Network Elements Backups A backup operation allows to transfer important configuration information from a network element, store it and use it in case of possible disaster. You can create backup directly on the network element as well as in an external device or in Network Management System (NMS). Additionally, you can proceed with a full backup option or choose a partial backup. Network element defines the content of the partial backup. Depending on the backup type and the storage type, the following backup operations are formed: •
Full Backup
•
Full Backup to External Device
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
455
456
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
•
Full Backup to NMS
•
Partial Backup
•
Partial Backup to External Device
•
Partial Backup to NMS
For some network elements, you can also create the Custom Backup to NMS operation. By using the custom attributes you determine the scope of data to backup.
Figure 310: Creating Network Elements Backups
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
Software Management
Summary: Software Management Module Summary This module covered the following learning objectives: •
Use Software Manager for network element software synchronization, reporting and import.
•
Perform backup tasks for the supported network elements.
© Nokia Solutions and Networks. All rights reserved.
457